Cambium Networks 89FT0010 Dual Channel 3.65GHz MIMO Access Point Transceiver User Manual PMP 450 Planning Guide

Cambium Networks Inc. Dual Channel 3.65GHz MIMO Access Point Transceiver PMP 450 Planning Guide

Contents

Exhibit D Users Manual per 2 1033 c3

Download: Cambium Networks 89FT0010 Dual Channel 3.65GHz MIMO Access Point Transceiver User Manual PMP 450 Planning Guide
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]Cambium Networks 89FT0010 Dual Channel 3.65GHz MIMO Access Point Transceiver User Manual PMP 450 Planning Guide
Document ID2204371
Application IDmCW1EMo/GHyR1iS6IAIT6Q==
Document DescriptionExhibit D Users Manual per 2 1033 c3
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize232.5kB (2906292 bits)
Date Submitted2014-03-03 00:00:00
Date Available2014-03-20 00:00:00
Creation Date2014-02-27 15:45:44
Producing SoftwareAdobe PDF Library 11.0
Document Lastmod2014-02-27 15:46:41
Document TitlePMP 450 Planning Guide
Document CreatorAcrobat PDFMaker 11 for Word
Document Author: Martin Gray

Cambium
PMP 450 Planning Guide
System Release 13.1
PMP 450 module essential information
Default IP Address for Management GUI Access
169.254.1.1
Default Administrator Username
admin
Default Administrator Password
(no password)
Software Upgrade Procedure
See “Updating the software version and using
CNUT” in the PMP 450 Configuration and User
Guide
1.
On the radio GUI, navigate to Configuration,
Unit Settings and select Set to Factory Defaults
OR
Resetting to Factory Defaults (2 options)
ii
2.
On the radio GUI, navigate to Configuration,
Unit Settings and enable and save option Set to
Factory Defaults Upon Default Plug Detection.
When the unit is powered on with a
default/override plug (see section “Acquiring
the Override Plug” in the PMP 450
Configuration and User Guide) the radio will
be returned to its factory default settings.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Cambium Networks assumes no
liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained
herein. Cambium reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability, function,
or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof
with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Cambium does not assume any liability arising out of
the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its
patent rights or the rights of others. It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information
about Cambium products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your
country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean that Cambium intends to announce such
Cambium products, programming, or services in your country.
Copyrights
This document, Cambium products, and 3rd Party Software products described in this document may include or
describe copyrighted Cambium and other 3rd Party supplied computer programs stored in semiconductor memories
or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Cambium, its licensors, and other 3rd
Party supplied software certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right to copy,
reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any
copyrighted material of Cambium, its licensors, or the 3rd Party software supplied material contained in the
Cambium products described in this document may not be copied, reproduced, reverse engineered, distributed,
merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Cambium. Furthermore, the purchase of
Cambium products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license
under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Cambium or other 3rd Party supplied software, except for the
normal non-exclusive, royalty free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Restrictions
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of
the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of
Cambium.
License Agreements
The software described in this document is the property of Cambium and its licensors. It is furnished by express
license agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.
High Risk Materials
Components, units, or 3rd Party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault-tolerant and are NOT
designed, manufactured, or intended for use as on-line control equipment in the following hazardous environments
requiring fail-safe controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication
Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life Support, or Weapons Systems (High Risk Activities). Cambium and its supplier(s)
specifically disclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.
© 2014 Cambium Networks, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
iii
Safety and regulatory information
This section describes important safety and regulatory guidelines that must be observed by personnel installing
or operating PMP 450 equipment.
Important safety information
To prevent loss of life or physical injury, observe the safety guidelines in this section.
Power lines
Exercise extreme care when working near power lines.
Working at heights
Exercise extreme care when working at heights.
Grounding and protective earth
PMP 450 units must be properly grounded to protect against lightning. It is the user’s responsibility to install
the equipment in accordance with national regulations. In the USA, follow Section 810 of the National Electric
Code, ANSI/NFPA No.70-1984 (USA). In Canada, follow Section 54 of the Canadian Electrical Code. These
codes describe correct installation procedures for grounding the outdoor unit, mast, lead-in wire and discharge
unit, size of grounding conductors and connection requirements for grounding electrodes. Other regulations
may apply in different countries and therefore it is recommended that installation of the outdoor unit be
contracted to a professional installer.
Powering down before servicing
Always power down and unplug the equipment before servicing.
Primary disconnect device
The AP or SM unit’s power supply is the primary disconnect device.
External cables
Safety may be compromised if outdoor rated cables are not used for connections that will be exposed to the
outdoor environment.
iv
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
RF exposure near the antenna
Radio frequency (RF) fields will be present close to the antenna when the transmitter is on. Always turn off the
power to the PMP 450 unit before undertaking maintenance activities in front of the antenna.
Minimum separation distances
Install the AP/SM so as to provide and maintain the minimum separation distances from all persons.
The minimum separation distances for each frequency variant are specified in Calculated distances and power
compliance margins on page 3-14.
Important regulatory information
The PMP 450 product is certified as an unlicensed device in frequency bands where it is not allowed to cause
interference to licensed services (called primary users of the bands).
Radar avoidance
In countries where radar systems are the primary band users, the regulators have mandated special
requirements to protect these systems from interference caused by unlicensed devices. Unlicensed devices must
detect and avoid co-channel operation with radar systems.
Installers and users must meet all local regulatory requirements for radar detection. To meet these
requirements, users must set the correct Country Code during commissioning of the PMP 450. If this is not
done, installers and users may be liable to civil and criminal penalties.
Contact the Cambium helpdesk if more guidance is required.
USA and Canada specific information
The USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has asked manufacturers to implement special features
to prevent interference to radar systems that operate in the 5250-5350 and 5470-5725 MHz bands. These
features must be implemented in all products able to operate outdoors in the UNII band. The use of the 5600 –
5650 MHz band is prohibited, even with detect-and-avoid functionality implemented.
Manufacturers must ensure that such radio products cannot be configured to operate outside of FCC rules;
specifically it must not be possible to disable or modify the radar protection functions that have been
demonstrated to the FCC.
In order to comply with these FCC requirements, Cambium supplies variants of the PMP 450 for operation in
the USA or Canada. These variants are only allowed to operate with Country Codes that comply with FCC/IC
rule.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
Contents
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Contents
PMP 450 module essential information .................................................................................................................. ii
Safety and regulatory information .................................................................................. iv
Important safety information ........................................................................................................................ iv
Important regulatory information .................................................................................................................. v
About This Planning Guide ........................................................................................... 1-4
General information ........................................................................................................................................... 1-5
Version information .................................................................................................................................... 1-5
Contacting Cambium Networks ................................................................................................................... 1-5
Problems and warranty ...................................................................................................................................... 1-7
Security advice................................................................................................................................................... 1-9
Warnings, cautions, and notes .......................................................................................................................... 1-10
Overview of PMP 450....................................................................................................................................... 1-11
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................... 1-11
Key features.............................................................................................................................................. 1-11
Typical deployment................................................................................................................................... 1-12
System components ................................................................................................................................... 1-13
Access Point (AP) ............................................................................................................................................ 1-16
Network connection .................................................................................................................................. 1-20
AP power supply ....................................................................................................................................... 1-20
Radio tab of the AP .................................................................................................................................. 1-21
Further reading on the AP......................................................................................................................... 1-26
Subscriber Module (SM) ................................................................................................................................... 1-27
Mounting brackets .................................................................................................................................... 1-27
Network connection .................................................................................................................................. 1-27
SM power supply ....................................................................................................................................... 1-27
Further reading on the SM ........................................................................................................................ 1-28
Radio tab of the SM .................................................................................................................................. 1-32
Cabling and lightning protection ...................................................................................................................... 1-38
PMP and lightning protection ................................................................................................................... 1-38
Outdoor connections.................................................................................................................................. 1-38
Wireless operation ............................................................................................................................................ 1-39
Time division duplexing ............................................................................................................................ 1-39
OFDM and channel bandwidth .................................................................................................................. 1-39
Link operation – Dynamic Rate Adapt ...................................................................................................... 1-40
Adaptive modulation................................................................................................................................. 1-48
MIMO ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-48
Cyclic Prefix ............................................................................................................................................. 1-48
vi
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Encryption................................................................................................................................................ 1-48
Further reading on wireless operation ........................................................................................................ 1-48
System management ........................................................................................................................................ 1-49
Management agent .................................................................................................................................... 1-49
Web server ................................................................................................................................................ 1-49
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) ............................................................................ 1-52
SNMP ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-52
Network Time Protocol (NTP) .................................................................................................................. 1-53
Wireless Manager (WM) ............................................................................................................................ 1-53
Capacity upgrades ..................................................................................................................................... 1-54
Software upgrade ...................................................................................................................................... 1-54
Further reading on system management .................................................................................................... 1-55
Chapter 1: Planning considerations ......................................................................... 1-56
Regulatory planning ........................................................................................................................................ 1-57
Obeying Regulatory limits......................................................................................................................... 1-57
Conforming to the limits ............................................................................................................................ 1-57
Network migration planning ............................................................................................................................ 1-58
Example PMP 450 deployment scenario .................................................................................................... 1-58
Sector capacity.......................................................................................................................................... 1-60
Site planning .................................................................................................................................................... 1-67
AP or SM site selection .............................................................................................................................. 1-67
Power supply site selection ........................................................................................................................ 1-67
Maximum cable lengths ............................................................................................................................. 1-67
Wind loading............................................................................................................................................. 1-68
Link planning .................................................................................................................................................. 1-71
Range and obstacles .................................................................................................................................. 1-71
Path loss considerations............................................................................................................................. 1-93
Calculating maximum power level for connectorized AP units .................................................................... 1-93
Understanding Attenuation ....................................................................................................................... 1-94
Calculating Link Loss ................................................................................................................................ 1-94
Calculating Rx Signal Level ...................................................................................................................... 1-94
Calculating Fade Margin ........................................................................................................................... 1-95
Analyzing the RF Environment ....................................................................................................................... 1-95
Mapping RF Neighbor Frequencies ........................................................................................................... 1-95
Analyzing the spectrum ............................................................................................................................. 1-96
Anticipating Reflection of Radio Waves .................................................................................................... 1-97
Noting Possible Obstructions in the Fresnel Zone ....................................................................................... 1-97
Multiple OFDM Access Point Clusters ....................................................................................................... 1-98
Planning for co-location and using the OFDM Frame Calculator Tool ...................................................... 1-100
Selecting Sites for Network Elements.............................................................................................................. 1-103
Surveying Sites ....................................................................................................................................... 1-104
Clearing the Radio Horizon ..................................................................................................................... 1-104
Calculating the Aim Angles ..................................................................................................................... 1-105
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
vii
Contents
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Diagramming Network Layouts ..................................................................................................................... 1-106
Avoiding Self Interference ....................................................................................................................... 1-106
Avoiding Other Interference .................................................................................................................... 1-107
Grounding and lightning protection ................................................................................................................ 1-108
The need for power surge protection......................................................................................................... 1-108
Standards................................................................................................................................................ 1-108
Lightning protection zones ...................................................................................................................... 1-109
General protection requirements .............................................................................................................. 1-110
Protection requirements for a mast or tower installation .......................................................................... 1-111
Protection requirements for a wall installation ......................................................................................... 1-112
Protection requirements on a high rise building........................................................................................ 1-113
Configuration options for TDD synchronization.............................................................................................. 1-116
GPS synchronization ............................................................................................................................... 1-117
Mounting the GPS receiver (CMM or UGPS) module on the equipment building ....................................... 1-119
Mounting the GPS receiver (CMM or UGPS) module on a metal tower or mast ......................................... 1-119
Data network planning................................................................................................................................... 1-120
Understanding addresses ......................................................................................................................... 1-120
Dynamic or static addressing ................................................................................................................... 1-120
DNS Client.............................................................................................................................................. 1-121
Network Address Translation (NAT) ....................................................................................................... 1-121
Developing an IP addressing scheme........................................................................................................ 1-122
Address Resolution Protocol .................................................................................................................... 1-122
Allocating subnets ................................................................................................................................... 1-123
Selecting non-routable IP addresses ......................................................................................................... 1-123
Translation bridging ................................................................................................................................ 1-124
Engineering VLANs ................................................................................................................................ 1-124
Security planning ........................................................................................................................................... 1-128
Isolating APs from the Internet ............................................................................................................... 1-128
Managing module access by passwords ..................................................................................................... 1-128
Filtering protocols and ports.................................................................................................................... 1-132
Port Lockdown ....................................................................................................................................... 1-135
Isolating SMs .......................................................................................................................................... 1-135
Filtering management through Ethernet ................................................................................................. 1-136
Allowing management from only specified IP addresses ........................................................................... 1-136
Configuring management IP by DHCP .................................................................................................... 1-136
Planning for airlink security .................................................................................................................... 1-137
Planning for RF Telnet Access Control .................................................................................................... 1-137
Forwarding Downlink PPPoE PADI packets........................................................................................... 1-137
Planning for RADIUS integration ........................................................................................................... 1-137
Planning for SNMP security .................................................................................................................... 1-138
Ordering components ..................................................................................................................................... 1-139
PMP 450 component part numbers .......................................................................................................... 1-139
Chapter 2:
viii
Legal information ..................................................................................... 2-1
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Cambium Networks end user license agreement................................................................................................... 2-2
Acceptance of this agreement ...................................................................................................................... 2-2
Definitions .................................................................................................................................................. 2-2
Grant of license ........................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Conditions of use ......................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Title and restrictions ................................................................................................................................... 2-3
Confidentiality ............................................................................................................................................ 2-4
Right to use Cambium’s name ..................................................................................................................... 2-4
Transfer ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
Updates ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................... 2-5
Disclaimer ................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
Limitation of liability .................................................................................................................................. 2-5
U.S. government ......................................................................................................................................... 2-6
Term of license ............................................................................................................................................ 2-6
Governing law ............................................................................................................................................. 2-6
Assignment ................................................................................................................................................. 2-6
Survival of provisions .................................................................................................................................. 2-6
Entire agreement......................................................................................................................................... 2-7
Third party software ................................................................................................................................... 2-7
Hardware warranty.......................................................................................................................................... 2-10
Limit of liability............................................................................................................................................... 2-11
Chapter 3: Reference information .............................................................................. 3-1
Equipment specifications ................................................................................................................................... 3-2
AP specifications ......................................................................................................................................... 3-2
SM specifications ......................................................................................................................................... 3-7
Wireless specifications ...................................................................................................................................... 3-10
General wireless specifications ................................................................................................................... 3-10
Data network specifications.............................................................................................................................. 3-11
Ethernet interface ..................................................................................................................................... 3-11
Compliance with safety standards ..................................................................................................................... 3-12
Electrical safety compliance ...................................................................................................................... 3-12
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance...................................................................................... 3-12
Human exposure to radio frequency energy ............................................................................................... 3-13
Compliance with radio regulations .................................................................................................................... 3-16
Type approvals ......................................................................................................................................... 3-16
DFS for 5.4 GHz Radios ............................................................................................................................ 3-17
Country Codes and available spectrum ....................................................................................................... 3-20
FCC compliance testing ............................................................................................................................. 3-36
FCC and ICC IDs and certification numbers ............................................................................................... 3-36
Notifications .................................................................................................................................................... 3-42
PMP 450 regulatory compliance ................................................................................................................ 3-42
Appendix A:
Glossary ..................................................................................................... I
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
ix
List of Figures
PMP 450 Planning Guide
List of Figures
Figure 1 Line Of Sight Diagram ............................................................................................................................. 1-12
Figure 2 AP, Radio unit ........................................................................................................................................ 1-16
Figure 3 AP, antenna ............................................................................................................................................ 1-16
Figure 4 AP interfaces – 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6GHz, 5 GHz..................................................................................... 1-17
Figure 5 AP interfaces - 5 GHz original layout ........................................................................................................ 1-18
Figure 6 AP ground and equilibrium membrane vent .............................................................................................. 1-19
Figure 7 AP diagnostic LEDs, viewed from front of the unit ................................................................................... 1-19
Figure 8 Radio tab of the AP .................................................................................................................................. 1-21
Figure 9 PMP 450 Series SM ................................................................................................................................... 1-27
Figure 10 SM interfaces .......................................................................................................................................... 1-28
Figure 11 Connectorized SM ................................................................................................................................... 1-29
Figure 12 SM diagnostic LEDs, viewed from front of the unit .................................................................................. 1-30
Figure 13 Radio tab of the SM ............................................................................................................................... 1-32
Figure 14 Custom Frequency tab of the SM ............................................................................................................ 1-33
Figure 15 TDD Frame Division .............................................................................................................................. 1-39
Figure 16 AP web-based management screenshot .................................................................................................... 1-50
Figure 17 Determinants in Rx signal level ............................................................................................................... 1-94
Figure 18 Example layout of 16 Access Point sectors (ABCD), 90 degree sectors ...................................................... 1-98
Figure 19 Example layout of 16 Access Point sectors (ABC), 60 degree sectors ......................................................... 1-99
Figure 20 OFDM Frame Calculator tab................................................................................................................. 1-101
Figure 21 Variables for calculating angle of elevation (and depression)................................................................... 1-105
Figure 22 Rolling sphere method to determine the lightning protection zones ........................................................ 1-109
Figure 23 Grounding cable minimum bend radius and angle .................................................................................. 1-110
Figure 24 Grounding and lightning protection on mast or tower ............................................................................ 1-111
Figure 25 Grounding and lightning protection on wall ........................................................................................... 1-112
Figure 26 Grounding and lightning protection on building ..................................................................................... 1-115
Figure 27 Grounding and lightning protection inside high building ........................................................................ 1-115
Figure 28 One unsynchronized AP in cluster resulting in self-interference .............................................................. 1-118
Figure 29 GPS timing throughout the network...................................................................................................... 1-118
Figure 30 Cambium network management domain ................................................................................................ 1-121
Figure 31 Example of IP address in Class B subnet ............................................................................................... 1-123
Figure 32 Categorical protocol filtering ................................................................................................................. 1-134
Figure 33 AP DFS Status ....................................................................................................................................... 3-17
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
List of Tables
List of Tables
Table 1 PMP 450 frequency variants ...................................................................................................................... 1-14
Table 2 AP interface descriptions and cabling – 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 5 GHz ............................................................... 1-17
Table 3 AP interface descriptions and cabling – 5 GHz original layout ..................................................................... 1-18
Table 4 AP interface descriptions and cabling – ground lug ..................................................................................... 1-19
Table 5 AP LED descriptions ................................................................................................................................. 1-20
Table 6 AP Radio attributes .................................................................................................................................. 1-22
Table 7 SM Interfaces ............................................................................................................................................. 1-29
Table 8 SM diagnostic LED descriptions ................................................................................................................. 1-31
Table 9 SM Radio attributes .................................................................................................................................. 1-34
Table 10 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.4 GHz............................................................................... 1-41
Table 11 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.8 GHz............................................................................... 1-42
Table 12 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 2.4GHz ............................................................................... 1-43
Table 13 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 3.5GHz ............................................................................... 1-44
Table 14 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 3.6GHz ............................................................................... 1-45
Table 15 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM ............................... 1-46
Table 16 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM ............................... 1-47
Table 17 Deployment scenario terminology descriptions .......................................................................................... 1-58
Table 18 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – FSK (PMP 1x0 Series) ........................................................... 1-60
Table 19 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – OFDM (PMP 430 Series) ........................................................ 1-60
Table 20 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – OFDM MIMO (PMP 450 Series) ............................................. 1-61
Table 21 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM ................................................ 1-62
Table 22 Deployment scenario 1 ............................................................................................................................. 1-62
Table 23 Scenario 1 spectrum usage ........................................................................................................................ 1-63
Table 24 Deployment scenario 2 ............................................................................................................................. 1-65
Table 25 Deployment scenario 2 spectrum usage ..................................................................................................... 1-66
Table 26 Sync cable length specification.................................................................................................................. 1-67
Table 27 Lateral force - metric ................................................................................................................................ 1-68
Table 28 Lateral force - US ..................................................................................................................................... 1-69
Table 29 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth ................................................ 1-72
Table 30 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth ................................................ 1-73
Table 31 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth.................................................. 1-74
Table 32 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth ................................................ 1-75
Table 33 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth ................................................ 1-76
Table 34 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth.................................................. 1-77
Table 35 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth ................................................ 1-78
Table 36 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth ................................................ 1-79
Table 37 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth.................................................. 1-80
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 38 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth ................................................ 1-81
Table 39 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth ................................................ 1-82
Table 40 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth.................................................. 1-83
Table 41 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth ................................................ 1-84
Table 42 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth ................................................ 1-85
Table 43 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth.................................................. 1-86
Table 44 Link budget details – 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 20MHz Channel Bandwidth ................ 1-87
Table 45 Link budget details – 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 10MHz Channel Bandwidth ................ 1-88
Table 46 Link budget details – 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 5MHz Channel Bandwidth .................. 1-89
Table 47 Link budget details – 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 20MHz Channel Bandwidth ................ 1-90
Table 48 Link budget details – 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 10MHz Channel Bandwidth ................ 1-91
Table 49 Link budget details – 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 5MHz Channel Bandwidth .................. 1-92
Table 50 Example 5.8-GHz OFDM channel assignment by sector ............................................................................ 1-98
Table 51 Example 5.8-GHz OFDM channel assignment by sector ............................................................................ 1-99
Table 52 OFDM Frame Calculator tab attributes .................................................................................................. 1-101
Table 53 OFDM Calculated Frame Results attributes ........................................................................................... 1-102
Table 54 Special case VLAN IDs........................................................................................................................... 1-125
Table 55 VLAN filters in point-to-multipoint modules .......................................................................................... 1-126
Table 56 Q-in-Q Ethernet frame ........................................................................................................................... 1-127
Table 57 Identity-based user account permissions - AP ......................................................................................... 1-129
Table 58 Identity-based user account permissions - SM ......................................................................................... 1-131
Table 59 Ports filtered per protocol selections........................................................................................................ 1-135
Table 60 Device default port numbers ................................................................................................................... 1-135
Table 61 PMP 450 components ............................................................................................................................. 1-139
Table 62 Connectorized AP physical specifications .................................................................................................... 3-2
Table 63 SM physical specifications .......................................................................................................................... 3-7
Table 64 PMP 450 wireless specifications ................................................................................................................ 3-10
Table 65 PMP 450 Ethernet bridging specifications ................................................................................................. 3-11
Table 66 PMP 450 safety compliance specifications ................................................................................................. 3-12
Table 67 EMC emissions compliance ....................................................................................................................... 3-12
Table 68 Power Compliance Margins ....................................................................................................................... 3-15
Table 69 Radio certifications .................................................................................................................................. 3-16
Table 70 OFDM DFS operation based on Country Code setting ............................................................................... 3-19
Table 71 Center channel details based on Country Code, 2.4 GHz ............................................................................ 3-21
Table 72 AP Default combined transmits power per Country Code and Lower/Upper Band Edge Path Max TX Detail,
2.4 GHz. .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-21
Table 73 Center channel details based on Country Code, 3.5 GHz............................................................................ 3-22
Table 74 AP default combined transmit power per Country Code – 3.5 GHz band. ................................................... 3-25
Table 75 Center channel details based on Country Code, 3.6 GHz............................................................................ 3-26
Table 76 AP default combined transmit power per Country Code – 3.6 GHz band .................................................... 3-28
Table 77 Center channel details based on Country Code, 5.4 GHz ............................................................................ 3-29
Table 78 Center channel details based on Country Code, 5.8 GHz ............................................................................ 3-30
Table 79 Default combined transmit power per Country Code – 5.4 GHz band ......................................................... 3-31
1-2
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 80 Default combined transmit power per Country Code – 5.8 GHz band ......................................................... 3-33
Table 81 US FCC IDs and Industry Canada Certification Numbers and Covered Configurations............................... 3-36
Table 82 Industry Canada approved antenna list .................................................................................................... 3-43
Table 83 Glossary ........................................................................................................................................................ I
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-3
PMP 450 Planning Guide
About This Planning Guide
This guide describes the planning of the Cambium PMP 450 Series of point-to-multipoint wireless equipment
deployment. It is intended for use by the system designer.
The guide consists of the following chapters:
1-4
•
0Product description on page 1-6
•
Chapter 1: Planning considerations on page 1-56
•
Chapter 2: Legal information on page 2-1
•
Chapter 3: Reference information on page 3-1
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
General information
Version information
The following shows the issue status of this document since it was first released:
Issue
Date of issue
Remarks
001v000
September 2012
System Release 12.0
002v000
October 2012
Includes additional co-location information
003v000
November 2012
Updated for System Release 12.0.1
004v000
January 2013
Updated for System Release 12.0.2
005v000
March 2013
Updated for System Release 12.0.3/12.0.3.1
Includes additional performance details (SNR)
006v000
June 2013
Updated for System Release 12.1
008v000
September 2013
Updated for System Release 12.1.2
009v000
December 2013
Updated for System Release 12.2
010v000
February 2014
Updated for System Release 13.0
011v000
March 2014
Updated for System Release 13.1
007v000
Contacting Cambium Networks
PMP support website: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support
Cambium main website: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/
Sales enquiries: solutions@cambiumnetworks.com
Email support: support@cambiumnetworks.com
Telephone numbers:
For full list of Cambium support telephone numbers, see:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/contact-support
Address:
Cambium Networks
3800 Golf Road, Suite 360
Rolling Meadows, IL 60008
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-5
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Product description
This chapter provides a high level description of the PMP 450 product. It describes in general terms the
function of the product, the main product variants and typical deployment. It also describes the main
hardware components.
The chapter consists of the following topics:
•
Overview of PMP 450 on page 1-11: Introduces the key features, typical uses, product variants and
components of the PMP 450.
•
Access Point (AP) on page 1-16: Describes the AP and its interfaces
•
Subscriber Module (SM) on page 1-27: Describes the SM and its interfaces
•
Cabling and lightning protection on page 1-38: Describes the cabling and lightning protection components
of a PMP 450 installation.
•
Wireless operation on page 1-39: Describes how the PMP 450 wireless link is operated, including
modulation modes, power control and security.
•
System management on page 1-49: Introduces the PMP 450 management system, including the web
interface, installation, configuration, alerts and upgrades.
Purpose
Cambium Networks Point-To-Multipoint (PMP) documents are intended to instruct and assist personnel in the
operation, installation and maintenance of the Cambium PMP equipment and ancillary devices. It is
recommended that all personnel engaged in such activities be properly trained.
Cambium disclaims all liability whatsoever, implied or express, for any risk of damage, loss or reduction in
system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the customer, or anyone acting on the
customer's behalf, to abide by the instructions, system parameters, or recommendations made in this
document.
Cross references
References to external publications are shown in italics. Other cross references, emphasized in blue text in
electronic versions, are active links to the references.
This document is divided into numbered chapters that are divided into sections. Sections are not numbered,
but are individually named at the top of each page, and are listed in the table of contents.
Feedback
We appreciate feedback from the users of our documents. This includes feedback on the structure, content,
accuracy, or completeness of our documents. Send feedback to email support (see ‘Contacting Cambium
Networks’).
1-6
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Problems and warranty
Reporting problems
If any problems are encountered when installing or operating this equipment, follow this procedure to
investigate and report:
Search this document and the software release notes of supported releases.
Visit the support website. http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support
Ask for assistance from the Cambium product supplier.
Gather information from affected units such as:
•
The IP addresses and MAC addresses.
•
The software releases.
•
The configuration of software features.
•
Any available diagnostic downloads.
•
CNUT Support Capture Tool information
Escalate the problem by emailing or telephoning support.
See ‘Contacting Cambium Networks’ for URLs, email addresses and telephone numbers.
Repair and service
If unit failure is suspected, obtain details of the Return Material Authorization (RMA) process from the
support website.
Warranty
Cambium’s standard hardware warranty is for one (1) year from date of shipment from Cambium or a
Cambium distributor. Cambium warrants that hardware will conform to the relevant published specifications
and will be free from material defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service. Cambium
shall within this time, at its own option, either repair or replace the defective product within thirty (30) days of
receipt of the defective product. Repaired or replaced product will be subject to the original warranty period
but not less than thirty (30) days.
To register PMP products or activate warranties, visit the support website.
Extended warranties are available for PMP products. For warranty assistance, contact the reseller or
distributor.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-7
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Using non-Cambium parts for repair could damage the equipment and void the warranty. Contact Cambium
for service and repair instructions.
Portions of Cambium equipment may be damaged from exposure to electrostatic discharge. Use precautions
to prevent damage.
1-8
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Security advice
Cambium Networks systems and equipment provide security parameters that can be configured by the
operator based on their particular operating environment. Cambium recommends setting and using these
parameters following industry recognized security practices. Security aspects to be considered are protecting
the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of information and assets. Assets include the ability to
communicate, information about the nature of the communications, and information about the parties
involved.
In certain instances Cambium makes specific recommendations regarding security practices, however the
implementation of these recommendations and final responsibility for the security of the system lies with the
operator of the system.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-9
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Warnings, cautions, and notes
The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this document and in all documents of the
Cambium Networks document set.
Warnings
Warnings precede instructions that contain potentially hazardous situations. Warnings are used to alert the
reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life or physical injury. A warning has the following format:
Warning text and consequence for not following the instructions in the warning.
Cautions
Cautions precede instructions and are used when there is a possibility of damage to systems, software, or
individual items of equipment within a system. However, this damage presents no danger to personnel. A
caution has the following format:
Caution text and consequence for not following the instructions in the caution.
Notes
A note means that there is a possibility of an undesirable situation or provides additional information to help
the reader understand a topic or concept. A note has the following format:
Note text.
1-10
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Overview of PMP 450
This section introduces the key features, typical uses, product variants and components of the PMP 450.
Purpose
Cambium PMP 450 Series networks are designed for wireless point-to-multipoint links in the unlicensed 2.4
GHz, 3.5GHz, 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz bands. Users must ensure that the PMP 450 Series complies with local
operating regulations.
The PMP 450 Series adds dramatically increased network throughput and capacity. The PMP 450 Series
enables network operators to grow their business by offering more capacity for data, voice and video
applications.
Key features
The Cambium PMP 450 Series offers the following benefits:
•
Cambium’s highest performing point-to-multipoint solution, with up to 90 Mbps usable throughput
•
State-of-the-art MIMO (Multi-In Multi-Out) technology
•
Better spectral efficiency than other MIMO alternatives
•
Efficient GPS synchronized, scheduled TDD operation for easy Access Point site deployment and
performance that is consistent regardless of subscriber loading
•
A range of cost-effective subscriber device solutions to meet the business case of any network application
•
MIMO Matrix B: This technique provides for the ability to double the throughput of a radio transmission
under proper RF conditions. Different data streams are transmitted simultaneously on two different
antennas.
nLOS benefits and limitations
In addition to providing LOS (Line-Of-Sight) connectivity, use of OFDM technology can provide nLOS (near
Line-Of-Sight) connectivity and sometimes NLOS (Non-Line-Of-Sight) connectivity:
•
LOS: the installer can see the AP from the SM and the first Fresnel zone is clear.
•
nLOS: the installer can see the AP from the SM, but a portion of the first Fresnel zone is blocked.
•
NLOS: the installer cannot see the AP from the SM and a portion or even much of the first Fresnel zone is
blocked, but subsequent Fresnel zones are open.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-11
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Figure 1 Line Of Sight Diagram
Whereas multi-pathing degrades a link in some technologies (FSK, for example), OFDM can often use multipathing to an advantage to overcome nLOS, especially in cases where the Fresnel zone is only partially blocked
by buildings, “urban canyons”, or foliage. OFDM tends to help especially when obstacles are near the middle of
the link, and less so when the obstacles are very near the SM or AP.
However, attenuation through walls and trees is substantial for any use of the 2.4/3.5/5.4/5.8 GHz frequency
bands. Even with OFDM, these products should not be expected to penetrate walls or extensive trees and
foliage.
Typical deployment
The PMP 450 Series consists of Access Point Modules and Subscriber Modules. The radio link operates on a
single frequency channel in each direction using Time Division Duplex (TDD).
Applications for the PMP 450 Series include:
•
High throughput enterprise applications
•
nLOS video surveillance in metro areas
•
Urban area network extension
•
Network extension into areas with foliage
Greenfield deployment
The PMP 450 Series equipment may be deployed as a standalone network deployment offering a high-speed
access network.
1-12
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
System components
PMP 450 Access Point
•
Access Point Module (AP): A connectorized outdoor transceiver unit containing all the radio, networking,
antenna, and surge suppression electronics.
•
Access Point Power Supply: An indoor power supply module providing Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) supply
to the Access Point.
•
Cabling: Cat 5e cables, grounding cables, and connectors.
PMP 450 Subscriber Module
•
Subscriber Module (SM): An integrated-antenna outdoor transceiver unit containing all the radio, antenna,
and networking electronics.
•
Subscriber Module Power Supply: An indoor power supply module providing Power-over-Ethernet (PoE)
supply to the Subscriber Module.
•
Cabling and lightning protection: Cat 5e cables, grounding cables, connectors and lightning protection
(surge suppression).
•
Connectorized Subscriber Module (CSM): An outdoor transceiver unit containing all of the radio and
network electronics that needs to be mated with a customer supplied external antenna.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-13
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Product variants
The PMP 450 Series is available in the following product variants:
Table 1 PMP 450 frequency variants
1-14
Variant
Region
Frequency
Coverage
(MHz)
Channel
Bandwidth
(MHz)
2.4 GHz
PMP 450
FCC ISM Band
2400 – 2483.5
5/10/20
3.5 GHz
PMP 450
3300 – 3600
5/10/20
Combined
Transmit power
limited based
on Country
Code setting.
Available
center
frequencies
based on
Country Code
setting.
3.6 GHz
PMP 450
3650 – 3700
5/10/20
Combined
Transmit power
limited based
on Country
Code setting.
Available
center
frequencies
based on
Country Code
setting.
5470 - 5875
10/20
Combined
Transmit power
limited based
on Country
Code setting
5725 - 5875
5/10/20
US Only –
locked to US
Country Code
EIRP limit of
36 dBm and
5.8-GHz Only
5.4/5.8GHz
PMP 450
FCC UNII Band
5.8-GHz
PMP 450
(US
ONLY)
FCC ISM Band
ETSI Band B
ETSI Band C
Variant
Notes
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-15
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Access Point (AP)
The AP is a self-contained unit that houses both radio and networking electronics. The AP is supplied in a
connectorized configuration for use with an external antenna. Connectorized units with external antennas can
cope with more difficult radio conditions.
Figure 2 AP, Radio unit
1-16
Figure 3 AP, antenna
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
AP interfaces
The AP interfaces are illustrated below.
Figure 4 AP interfaces – 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6GHz, 5 GHz
Path A RF Port
Sync/Default
Ethernet
Path B RF Port
Table 2 AP interface descriptions and cabling – 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 5 GHz
Interface
Path A RF
Port
Path B RF
Port
Function
2.4 GHz
-45 degree RF connection to AP antenna
3.5 GHz
-45 degree RF connection to AP antenna
3.6 GHz
-45 degree RF connection to AP antenna
5 GHz
Vertical RF connection to AP antenna
2.4 GHz
+45 degree RF connection to AP antenna
3.5 GHz
+45 degree RF connection to AP antenna
3.6 GHz
+45 degree RF connection to AP antenna
5 GHz
Horizontal RF connection to AP antenna
Sync / Default
Power-over-Ethernet,
Ethernet communications
(management and data)
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
Cabling
50 ohm RF cable, N-type
50 ohm RF cable, N-type
GPS synchronization signaling provides
power to UGPS module and is the default
plug port.
RJ11 cable, default plug.
Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet
communications (management and data)
RJ45 cable
1-17
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Figure 5 AP interfaces - 5 GHz original layout
Path V RF Port
Path H RF Port
Sync/Default
Ethernet
Unused
Table 3 AP interface descriptions and cabling – 5 GHz original layout
Interface
Cabling
Path V RF Port
Vertical RF connection to AP antenna
50 ohm RF cable, N-type
Path H RF Port
Horizontal RF connection to AP
antenna
50 ohm RF cable, N-type
GPS synchronization signaling, provides
power to UGPS module. Default plug
port.
RJ11 cable, default plug.
Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet
communications (management and
data)
RJ45 cable
Sync / Default
Power-over-Ethernet,
Ethernet communications
(management and data)
1-18
Function
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Figure 6 AP ground and equilibrium membrane vent
Equilibrium Membrane Vent
(do not cover)
AP Ground
The ports on the 3.5GHz and 3.6GHz APs are slightly different.
Table 4 AP interface descriptions and cabling – ground lug
Interface
Ground Lug (bottom of unit)
Function
Cabling
For grounding the unit
10 AWG copper wire
AP diagnostic LEDs
The diagnostic LEDs report the following information about the status of the module.
The LED color helps you distinguish position of the LED. The LED color does not indicate any status.
Figure 7 AP diagnostic LEDs, viewed from front of the unit
PWR
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
SYN/1
SES/2
GPS/3
ACT/4
LNK/5
1-19
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 5 AP LED descriptions
LED
Color when active
Status information provided
Notes
PWR
red
DC power
Always lit when power
is correctly supplied.
SYN/1
yellow
Presence of sync
Always lit on the AP.
SES/2
green
Unused on the AP
GPS/3
red
Pulse of sync
Continuously lit as pulse
as AP receives pulse.
Flashes during data
ACT/4
yellow
Presence of data activity
transfer. Frequency of
on the Ethernet link
flash is not a diagnostic
indication.
LNK/5
green
Ethernet link
Continuously lit when link
is present.
Network connection
The network connection to a PMP 450 Series AP is made via a 10 BaseT or 100 BaseT Ethernet connection.
Power is provided to the AP over the Ethernet connection using a patented non-standard powering technique.
AP power supply
The AP power supply generates the AP supply voltage (29 VDC) from the external DC source and injects the
supply voltage into the AP.
The power supply is connected to the AP and network equipment using Cat5e cable with RJ45 connectors. See
Cabling and lightning protection on page 1-38.
The PMP 450 AP can use the GigE power injector.
1-20
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Radio tab of the AP
Figure 8 Radio tab of the AP
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-21
PMP 450 Planning Guide
The Radio tab of the AP contains some of the configurable parameters that define how the AP operates.
Table 6 AP Radio attributes
Attribute
Meaning
Radio Mode
Reserved for future modes of operation.
Frequency Band
Select the desired operating frequency band.
Frequency Carrier
Specify the frequency for the module to transmit. The default for this
parameter is None. For a list of channels in the band, see the drop-down list
on the radio GUI.
Channel Bandwidth
The channel size used by the radio for RF transmission. The setting for the
channel bandwidth must match between the AP and the SM. Note: Release
12.1 introduces the Band Scan feature which will allow the SM to scan all
Channel Bandwidths.
Cyclic Prefix
OFDM technology uses a cyclic prefix, where a portion of the end of a symbol
(slot) is repeated at the beginning of the symbol to allow multi-pathing to
settle before receiving the desired data. A 1/16 cyclic prefix means that for
every 16 bits of throughput data transmitted, an additional bit is used.
Color Code
Specify a value from 0 to 254. For registration to occur, the color code of the
SM and the AP must match. Color code is not a security feature. Instead, color
code is a management feature, typically for assigning each sector a different
color code.
Color code allows you to force an SM to register to only a specific AP, even
where the SM can communicate with multiple APs. The default setting for the
color code value is 0. This value matches only the color code of 0 (not all 255
color codes).
Max Range
Enter a number of miles (or kilometers divided by 1.61, then rounded to an
integer) for the furthest distance from which an SM is allowed to register to
this AP. Do not set the distance to any greater number of miles. A greater
distance
•
does not increase the power of transmission from the AP.
•
can reduce aggregate throughput.
Regardless of this distance, the SM must meet the minimum requirements for
an acceptable link. If the AP is in cluster, then you must set this parameter on
all other APs in the cluster exactly the same, except as described in the NOTE
admonition below. The default value of this parameter is 2 miles (3.2 km).
1-22
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Attribute
Meaning
Downlink Data
Specify the percentage of the aggregate throughput for the downlink (frames
transmitted from the AP to the subscriber). For example, if the aggregate
(uplink and downlink total) throughput on the AP is 90 Mb, then 75%
specified for this parameter allocates 67.5 Mb for the downlink and 22.5 Mb for
the uplink. The default for this parameter is 75%. This parameter must be set
in the range of 15% - 85%, otherwise the invalid input will not be accepted
and the previously-entered valid setting will be used.
In order to prevent self-interference, the frame configuration needs to
align. This includes Downlink Data, Max Range and Control Slots.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-23
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Attribute
Meaning
Control Slots
This field indicates the number of (reserved) control slots configured by the
operator. The SM uses reserved control slots and unused data slots for
bandwidth requests
Uplink Data Slots are used first for data. If they are not needed for data in a
given frame, the remaining data slots can be used by the SMs for bandwidth
requests. This allows SMs in sectors with a small number of control slots
configured to still successfully transmit bandwidth requests using unused data
slots.
A higher number of control slots give higher probability that an SM’s
bandwidth request will be correctly received when the system is heavily
loaded, but with the tradeoff that sector capacity is reduced, so there will be
less capacity to handle the request. The sector capacity reduction is about 200
kbps for each Control Slot configured in a 20 MHz channel at QPSK SISO
modulation. The reduction in sector capacity is proportionally higher at
MIMO modulations (2 times at QPSK MIMO, 4 times at 16 QAM MIMO, 6
times at 64 QAM MIMO and 8 times at 256 QAM MIMO). If too few reserved
control slots are specified, then latency increases in high traffic periods. If too
many are specified, then the maximum capacity is unnecessarily reduced.
The suggested Control Slot settings as a function of the number of active VCs
in the sector are shown in the table below.
Number of VCs
Recommended Number of
Control Slots
1 to 10
11 to 50
51 to 150
151 and above
Note that each SM uses one or two VCs. All SMs have a Low Priority Channel
that uses one VC; if the High Priority Channel is enabled for the SM, then the
SM uses a second VC. Therefore the number of active VCs in a sector is greater
than or equal to the number of SMs registered to the AP in the sector. For
example, a network including 20 SMs with High Priority Channel disabled and
20 SMs with High Priority Channel enabled has 60 active VCs and may be
configured with 6 Control Slots.
1-24
In a typical cluster, each AP should be set to the same number of control slots
to assure proper timing in the send and receive cycles. However, where high
incidence of small packets exists, as in a sector that serves several VoIP
streams, additional control slots may provide better results. For APs in a
cluster of mismatched control slots setting, or where PMP 450 is collocated
with radios using different technologies, like PMP 430 or FSK, in the same
frequency band, use the frame calculator.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Attribute
Transmitter Output Power
Meaning
This value represents the combined power of the AP’s two transmitters.
Nations and regions may regulate transmitter output power. For example
•
5.4/5.8-GHz modules are available as connectorized radios, which require
the operator to adjust power to ensure regulatory compliance.
The professional installer of the equipment has the responsibility to
•
External Gain
Receive Quality Debug
maintain awareness of applicable regulations.
•
calculate the permissible transmitter output power for the module.
•
confirm that the initial power setting is compliant with national or
regional regulations.
•
confirm that the power setting is compliant following any reset of the
module to factory defaults.
This value represents the amount of gain introduced by an external antenna.
Module Type
Recommended
Setting
OFDM connectorized with antenna
that was purchased with it
17
To aid in link performance monitoring, the AP and SM now report the number
of fragments received per modulation (i.e. QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM) and per
channel (polarization).
Due to CPU load, this will slightly degrade packet per second processing.
Broadcast Repeat Count
The default is 2 repeats (in addition to the original broadcast packet, for a
total of 3 packets sent for every one needed), and is settable to 1 or 0 repeats (2
or 1 packets for every broadcast).
ARQ (Automatic Repeat reQuest) is not present in downlink broadcast
packets, since it would cause unnecessary uplink traffic from every SM for
each broadcast packet. For successful transport without ARQ, the AP repeats
downlink broadcast packets. The SMs filter out all repeated broadcast packets
and, thus, do not transport further.
The default of 2 repeats is optimum for typical uses of the network as an
internet access system. In applications with heavy download broadcast such as
video distribution, overall throughput is significantly improved by setting the
repeat count to 1 or 0. This avoids flooding the downlink with repeat
broadcast packets.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-25
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Attribute
Meaning
Subscriber Color Code
Rescan (When not on a
Primary Color Code)
This timer may be utilized to initiate SM rescans in order to register to an AP
configured with the SM‘s primary color code.
Subscriber Color Code
Wait Period for Idle
The time (in minutes) for a subscriber to rescan while idle (if this AP is not
configured with the SM’s primary color code). This timer will fire periodic
events. The fired event determines if any RF unicast traffic (either inbound or
outbound) has occurred since the last event. If the results of the event
determine that no RF unicast traffic has occurred (SM is idle), then the
subscriber will rescan.
Installation Color Code
With this feature enabled on the AP and SM, operators may install and
remotely configure SMs without having to configure matching color codes
between the modules. While the SM is accessible for configuration from above
the AP (for remote provisioning) and below the SM (for local site
provisioning), no user data is passed over the radio link. When using the
Installation Color Code feature, ensure that the SM is configured with the
factory default Color Code configuration (Color Code 1 is “0”, Color Code 2-10
set to “0” and “Disable”). The status of the Installation Color Code can be
viewed on the AP Eval web GUI page, and when the SM is registered using
the Installation Color Code the message “SM is registered via ICC – Bridging
Disabled!” is displayed in red on every SM GUI page. The Installation Color
Code parameter is configurable without a radio reboot for both the AP and
SM. If an SM is registered via Installation Color Code and the feature is then
disabled, operators will need to reboot the SM or force it to reregister (i.e.
using the Rescan APs functionality on the AP Eval page).
SM Receive Target Level
Each SM’s Transmitter Output Power is automatically set by the AP. The AP
monitors the received power from each SM, and adjusts each SM’s Transmitter
Output Power so that the received power at the AP from that SM is not
greater what is set in this field. This value represents a “single-port” power
perceived on the SM.
The time (in minutes) for a subscriber to rescan (if this AP is not configured
with the SM‘s primary color code). This timer will only fire once – if the
Subscriber Color Code Wait Period for Idle timer is configured with a nonzero
value and the Subscriber Color Code Rescan expires, the Subscriber Color Code
Wait Period for Idle will be started. If the Subscriber Color Code Wait Period
for Idle timer is configured with a zero value and the Subscriber Color Code
Rescan timer expires, the SM will immediately go into rescan mode
Further reading on the AP
For more information on the AP, refer to the following:
•
1-26
AP or SM site selection on page 1-67 describes how to select a site for the AP or SM.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Subscriber Module (SM)
The SM is a self-contained unit that houses both radio and networking electronics. The SM is available in a
connectorized model and also in an integrated antenna configuration, but may also be used with a passive
reflector dish or CLIP (Cassegrain Lens for Improved Performance, 5 GHz only).
Figure 9 PMP 450 Series SM
3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz PMP 450 SMs appear a bit different from the existing PMP 450 SMs.
Mounting brackets
For mounting PMP 450 SMs, Cambium Networks offers the SMMB1A mounting bracket.
Network connection
The network connection to a PMP 450 Series SM is made via a 10 BaseT or 100 BaseT Ethernet connection.
Power is provided to the SM over the Ethernet connection using a patented non-standard powering technique.
SM power supply
The SM power supply generates the SM supply voltage (29 VDC) from the external DC source and injects the
supply voltage into the SM.
The power supply is connected to the SM and network equipment using Cat5e cable with RJ45 connectors.
Refer to Cabling and lightning protection on page 1-38.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-27
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Further reading on the SM
For more information on the SM, refer to the following:
•
AP or SM site selection on page 1-67 describes how to select a site for the SM.
SM interfaces
Figure 10 SM interfaces
SM Ground
(connectorized
models)
Ethernet
Sync/Default
3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz SMs appear a bit different from the existing 450 SMs.
1-28
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Figure 11 Connectorized SM
External antenna
cable, path A
(labeled “A”)
External antenna
cable, path B
Table 7 SM Interfaces
Interface
Function
Cabling
Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet
communications (management and data)
RJ45 Cable
Sync / Default
GPS synchronization signaling provides
power to UGPS module and is the default
plug port.
RJ11 cable, default
plug
Ground Lug (rear of unit,
connectorized only)
For grounding the unit
10 AWG copper wire
External antenna cable, path
A (labeled “A”)
2.4 GHz
-45 degree antenna connection
3.5 GHz
-45 degree antenna connection
50 ohm RF cable, Ntype
3.6 GHz
-45 degree antenna connection
5 GHz
Vertical antenna connection
2.4 GHz
+45 degree antenna
connection
3.5 GHz
+45 degree antenna
connection
3.6 GHz
+45 degree antenna
connection
Ethernet
External antenna cable, path
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
50 ohm RF cable, Ntype
1-29
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Interface
Function
5 GHz
Cabling
Horizontal antenna
connection
SM diagnostic LEDs
The diagnostic LEDs report the following information about the status of the module. The SM LEDs provide
different status based on the mode of the SM. An SM in “operating” mode will register and pass traffic
normally. An SM in “aiming” mode will not register or pass traffic, but will display (via LED panel) the
strength of received radio signals (based on radio channel selected via Tools, Alignment).
The LED color helps you distinguish position of the LED. The LED color does not indicate any status.
Figure 12 SM diagnostic LEDs, viewed from front of the unit
SM LED Display
LED Labels
LNK/5
ACT/4
GPS/3
SES/2
SYN/1
PWR
The LED display of the 3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz SMs appear a bit different from the existing 450 SMs.
1-30
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 8 SM diagnostic LED descriptions
Status information provided
LED
Color
when
active
SM in
“Operating”
LNK/5
green
Ethernet link
ACT/4
yellow
SM in “Aiming”
Mode
Notes
Mode
Continuously lit when link is
present.
Presence of data
activity
on the Ethernet link
These five LEDs act
as a bar graph to
indicate the relative
quality of alignment.
As power level
improves during
alignment, more of
these LEDs are lit.
Flashes during data transfer.
Frequency of flash is not a
diagnostic indication.
On - high interference.
Blinking - medium interference.
Off - low interference.
GPS/3
red
Interference
SES/2
green
Strong Receive Signal
Power
SYN/1
yellow
Medium Receive
Signal Power
Blinking from slow to full-on to
indicate medium power, getting
stronger.
PWR
red
Registration Indicator
Off when registered to AP.
On when not registered to AP.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
Blinking from slow to full-on to
indicate strong power, getting
stronger.
1-31
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Radio tab of the SM
Figure 13 Radio tab of the SM
1-32
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Figure 14 Custom Frequency tab of the SM
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-33
PMP 450 Planning Guide
In the radio tab of the SM, you may set the following parameters.
Table 9 SM Radio attributes
Attribute
1-34
Meaning
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Attribute
Meaning
Custom Radio Frequency
Scan Selection List
Check any frequency that you want the SM to scan for AP transmissions.
Prior to System Release 13.1, the PMP 450 SM boot sequence included loading
the current channel bandwidth (10 MHz or 20 MHz, but not both) and
frequency band configuration (3.6 GHz) and scanning selected frequencies in
the respective frequency band. After a scan of all the selected frequencies the
SM would attempt to register to the best AP based on the SM’s current
configuration.
With the introduction of the Full Spectrum Band Scan feature in 12.0.3, SMs
first boot into the smallest selected channel bandwidth (10 MHz, if selected)
and scan all selected frequencies across the 3.6GHz frequency bands.
After this scan, if a wider channel bandwidth is selected (20 MHz), the SM
automatically changes to 20 MHz channel bandwidth and then scans for APs.
After the SM finishes this final scan it will evaluate the best AP with which to
register. If required for registration, the SM changes its channel bandwidth
back to 10 MHz to match the best AP.
The SM will attempt to connect to an AP based on power level (which affects
the modulation state), channel bandwidth (which affects throughput) and
number of SM registrations to the AP (which affects system contention
performance).
If it is desired to prioritize a certain AP over other available APs, operators
may use the Color Code Priority feature on the SM. Utilization of the Color
Code feature on the AP is recommended to further constrain the SM’s AP
selection.
If the SM does not find any suitable APs for registration after scanning all
channel bandwidths, the SM restarts the scanning process beginning with the
smallest configured channel bandwidth.
By default, beginning with System Release 12.0.3 SMs are configured to scan
all available frequencies and all available channel bandwidths. This allows
operators to install SMs and allow them to register with no pre-configuration
or staging required. SMs upgraded from a previous release to 12.0.3 retain
frequency and channel bandwidth configuration.
Selecting multiple frequencies and multiple channel bandwidths impacts the
SM scanning time. The biggest consumption of time is in the changing of the
SM channel bandwidth setting. The worst case scanning time is approximately
two minutes after bootup (SM with all frequencies and channel bandwidths
selected and registering to an AP at 10 MHz). If only one channel bandwidth
is selected the time to scan all the available frequencies and register to an AP
is approximately one minute after bootup.
Other scanning features such as Color Code, Installation Color Code, and
RADIUS authentication are unaffected by the Full Band Scan feature.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-35
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Attribute
Meaning
Channel Bandwidth
The channel size used by the radio for RF transmission.
Selecting multiple channel bandwidths will increase registration and reregistration times.
Cyclic Prefix Scan
The cyclic prefix for which AP scanning is executed.
AP Selection Method
Operators may configure the method by which a scanning SM selects an AP.
By default, AP Selection Method is set to “Optimize for Throughput”, which
has been the mode of operation in releases prior to 12.0.3.1.
Power Level: AP selection based solely on power level
OR
Optimize for Throughput: AP selection based on throughput optimization –
the selection decision is based on power level (which affects the modulation
state), channel bandwidth (which affects throughput) and number of SM
registrations to the AP (which affects system contention performance).
Color Code 1 to 10
Color code allows you to force the SM to register to only a specific AP, even
where the SM can communicate with multiple APs. For registration to occur,
the color code of the SM and the AP must match. Specify a value from 0 to
254.
Color code is not a security feature. Instead, color code is a management
feature, typically for assigning each sector a different color code. The default
setting for the color code value is 0. This value matches only the color code
of 0 (not all 255 color codes).
SMs may be configured with up to 10 color codes. These color codes can be
tagged as Primary, Secondary, or Tertiary, or Disable. When the SM is
scanning for APs, it will first attempt to register to an AP that matches one of
the SM’s primary color codes. Failing that, the SM will continue scanning and
attempt to register to an AP that matches one of the SM’s secondary color
codes. Failing that, the SM will continue scanning and attempt to register to
an AP that matches one of the SM’s tertiary color codes. This is all done in
the scanning mode of the SM and will repeat until a registration has occurred.
Color codes in the same priority group are treated equally. For example, all
APs matching one of the SM’s primary color codes are analyzed equally.
Likewise, this evaluation is done for the secondary and tertiary groups in
order. The analysis for selecting an AP within a priority group is based on
various inputs, including signal strength and number of SMs already registered
to each AP.
The first color code in the configuration is the pre-Release 9.5 color code.
Thus, it is always a primary color code for legacy reasons.
The color codes can be disabled, with the exception of the first color code.
1-36
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Attribute
Meaning
External Gain
This value represents the amount of gain introduced by an external antenna.
Receive Quality Debug
Module Type
Recommended
Setting
OFDM integrated antenna with LENS
OFDM Integrated antenna with CLIP
OFDM integrated antenna with reflector dish
15
To aid in link performance monitoring, the AP and SM now report the number
of fragments received per modulation (i.e. QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM) and per
channel (polarization).
Due to CPU load, this will slightly degrade packet per second processing.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-37
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Cabling and lightning protection
This section describes the cabling and lightning protection components of a PMP 450 installation.
PMP and lightning protection
Due to the full metallic connection to the tower or support structure through the AP antenna, grounding the
AP and installing a 600SS surge suppressor at the Ethernet cable building ingress is strongly recommended.
This suppresses overvoltages and overcurrents such as those caused by near-miss lightning. APs provide a
grounding lug for grounding to the tower or support structure.
The PMP 450 Series is not designed to survive direct lightning strikes. For this reason the unit should not be
installed as the highest point in a localized area.
Outdoor connections
The term ‘drop cable’ refers to the cable that is used for all connections that terminate outside the building, for
example, connections between the AP/SM, surge suppressors (if installed), GPS receivers (if installed) and the
power supply injector.
The following practices are essential to the reliability and longevity of cabled connections:
1-38
•
Use only shielded cables and connectors to resist interference and corrosion
•
For vertical runs, provide cable support and strain relief
•
Include a 2 ft (0.6 m) service loop on each end of the cable to allow for thermal expansion and contraction
and to facilitate terminating the cable again when needed
•
Include a drip loop to shed water so that most of the water does not reach the connector at the device
•
Properly crimp all connectors
•
Use dielectric grease on all connectors to resist corrosion
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Wireless operation
This section describes how the PMP 450 wireless link is operated, including modulation modes, power control
and security.
Time division duplexing
The system uses Time Division Duplexing (TDD) – one channel alternately transmits and receives rather than
using one channel for transmitting and a second channel for receiving. To accomplish TDD, the AP must
provide sync to its SMs. Furthermore, collocated APs must be synced together – an unsynchronized AP that
transmits during the receive cycle of a collocated AP can prevent a second AP from being able to decode the
signals from its SMs. In addition, across a geographical area, APs that can “hear” each other benefit from
using a common sync to further reduce self-interference within the network.
Modules use TDD on a common frequency to divide frames for uplink (orange) and downlink (green) usage, as
shown in the figure below.
For more information on synchronization configuration options, see section Planning for co-location and using
the OFDM Frame Calculator Tool on page 1-100.
Figure 15 TDD Frame Division
Time
OFDM and channel bandwidth
The PMP 450 Series transmits using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM). The channel
bandwidth of the OFDM signal may be configured to 5 MHz (2.4 GHz, 3.5GHz, 3.6 GHz and 5.8 GHz only), 10
MHz or 20 MHz.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-39
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Link operation – Dynamic Rate Adapt
PMP 450 Series products offer five levels or speeds of operation – 1x (QPSK), 2x (QPSK-MIMO-B), 4x
(16QAM-MIMO-B), 6x (64QAM-MIMO-B), and 8x (256QAM-MIMO-B). If received power is less due to
distance between the AP and the SM or due to obstructions, or if interference affects the RF environment, the
system will automatically and dynamically adjust links to the best operation level.
The system chooses its operation rate dynamically, based on an internal ARQ (Automatic Repeat reQuest)
error control method. With ARQ, every data slot of every frame sent over the air (except downlink broadcast)
is expected to be acknowledged by the receiver, and if acknowledgement is not received, the data is resent. The
sending unit monitors these resends, and adjusts the operation rate accordingly. A normal system may have
links that change levels of operation as the RF environment changes. Furthermore, the links operate
independently; normal operation can have a downlink running at 6x while the uplink RF environment only
supports 2x.
Optimal sector utilization involves having as many links as possible running at 8x. This provides as much
capacity as possible for the sector.
1-40
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 10 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.4 GHz
Product
Performance Details
Parameter
Modulation
PMP 450 * †
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSK-SISO
QPSK-MIMO
16-QAM-MIMO
64-QAM-MIMO
256-QAM-MIMO
5.4GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no fade
margin) – 20
MHz channel
bandwidth
with Integrated
SM antenna
4.8 mi / 7.68 km
3.4 mi / 5.44 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
0.7 mi / 1.12 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
14 dB to SM
Range
8.2 mi / 13.12
km
5.8 mi / 9.28 km
2.6 mi / 4.16 km
1.2 mi / 1.92 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
5.4GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no fade
margin) – 10
MHz channel
bandwidth
with Integrated
SM antenna
4.3 mi / 6.88 km
3.1 mi / 4.96 km
1.6 mi / 2.56 km
0.7 mi / 1.12 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
14 dB to SM
Range
7.5 mi / 12 km
5.3 mi / 8.48 km
2.4 mi / 3.84 km
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
5.4GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no fade
margin) – 5 MHz
channel
bandwidth
with Integrated
SM antenna
4 mi / 6.4 km
2.8 mi / 4.48 km
1.4 mi / 2.24 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
14 dB to SM
Range
7.3 mi / 11.68
km
5.2 mi / 8.32 km
2.3 mi / 3.68 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
20 MHz
Channel:
(up+down)
13 Mbps
30 Mbps
60 Mbps
98 Mbps
128 Mbps
10 MHz
Channel:
(up+down)
6 Mbps
13 Mbps
26 Mbps
42 Mbps
55 Mbps
5 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
2 Mbps
4 Mbps
8 Mbps
14 Mbps
18 Mbps
20 MHz Channel
-86 dBm
-86 dBm
-79 dBm
-72 dBm
-61 dBm
10 MHz Channel
-88 dBm
-88 dBm
-82 dBm
-75 dBm
-62 dBm
5 MHz Channel
-90 dBm
-90 dBm
-84 dBm
-80 dBm
-64 dBm
20 MHz Channel
124.9
121.9
114.9
107.9
96.9
10 MHz Channel
124
121
115.1
108
94.8
5 MHz Channel
123.3
120.3
114.4
110
94.3
5.4GHz Max.
Aggregate
Throughput
with 1/16 Cyclic
Prefix to 1 SM
(75%/25%
DL/UL Ratio) –
RF Link Test
5.4GHz Nominal
Per-Chain
Receive SM RX
Sensitivity
(including FEC) ‡
Link Budget,
Integrated (dB)
Maximum setting of Max Range parameter is 40 mi.
†
Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements.
PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (Vertical) and Channel B (Horizontal). Listed receive
sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings.
‡
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-41
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 11 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.8 GHz
Product
Performance Details
Parameter
Modulation
PMP 450 §
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSK-SISO
QPSK-MIMO
16-QAM-MIMO
64-QAM-MIMO
256-QAM-MIMO
5.8GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no fade
margin) – 20
MHz channel
bandwidth
with Integrated
SM antenna
8.5 mi / 13.6 km
6 mi / 9.6 km
2.7 mi / 4.32 km
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
14 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
30.3 mi / 48.48
km
13.7 mi / 21.92
km
5.6 mi / 8.96
km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
5.8GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no fade
margin) – 10
MHz channel
bandwidth
with Integrated
SM antenna
11.7 mi / 18.72
km
8.3 mi / 13.28 km
3.6 mi / 5.76 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
14 dB to SM
Range
32.9 mi / 52.64
km
23.3 mi / 37.28
km
10.3 mi / 16.48
km
4.1 mi / 6.56 km
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
5.8GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no fade
margin) – 5 MHz
channel
bandwidth
with Integrated
SM antenna
14.5 mi / 23.2 km
10.3 mi / 16.48
km
5.1 mi / 8.16 km
2.2 mi / 3.52 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
14 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
28.9 mi / 46.24
km
14.3 mi / 22.88
km
6.3 mi / 10.08 km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
20 MHz
Channel:
(up+down)
13 Mbps
30 Mbps
60 Mbps
98 Mbps
128 Mbps
10 MHz
Channel:
(up+down)
6 Mbps
13 Mbps
26 Mbps
42 Mbps
55 Mbps
5 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
2 Mbps
4 Mbps
8 Mbps
14 Mbps
18 Mbps
20 MHz Channel
-87 dBm
-87 dBm
-80 dBm
-72 dBm
-62 dBm
10 MHz Channel
-90 dBm
-90 dBm
-83 dBm
-76 dBm
-64 dBm
5 MHz Channel
-91 dBm
-91 dBm
-85 dBm
-79 dBm
-69 dBm
20 MHz Channel
130.5
127.5
120.6
112.8
102.5
10 MHz Channel
133.2
130.2
123.1
115.1
105
5 MHz Channel
135.1
132.1
126
118.9
107.5
5.8GHz Max.
Aggregate
Throughput
with 1/16 Cyclic
Prefix to 1 SM
(75%/25%
DL/UL Ratio) –
RF Link Test
5.8GHz Nominal
Per-Chain
Receive SM RX
Sensitivity
(including
FEC) **
Link Budget,
Integrated (dB)
§
1x
Maximum setting of Max Range parameter is 40 mi.
PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (Vertical) and Channel B (Horizontal). Listed receive
sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings.
**
1-42
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 12 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 2.4GHz
Product
Performance Details
Parameter
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSK-SISO
QPSK-MIMO
16-QAM-MIMO
64-QAM-MIMO
256-QAM-MIMO
with Integrated
SM antenna
15.2 mi / 24.32
km
10.8 mi / 17.28
km
5.4 mi / 8.64 km
2.4 mi / 3.84 km
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 12
dB to SM Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
21.5 mi / 34.4 km
9.6 mi / 15.36 km
4.3 mi / 6.88 km
with Integrated
SM antenna
24.1 mi / 38.56
km
17.1 mi / 27.36
km
7.3 mi / 11.68 km
3.6 mi / 5.76 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 12
dB to SM Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
29 mi / 46.4 km
14.4 mi / 23.04
km
3.8 mi / 6.08 km
with Integrated
SM antenna
27.1 mi / 43.36
km
19.2 mi / 30.72
km
10.8 mi / 17.28
km
4.3 mi / 6.88 km
1.4 mi / 2.24 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 12
dB to SM Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
17.1 mi / 27.36
km
5.4 mi / 8.64 km
20 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
13 Mbps
30 Mbps
59 Mbps
96 Mbps
129 Mbps
10 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
6 Mbps
13 Mbps
26 Mbps
42 Mbps
55 Mbps
5 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
2 Mbps
4 Mbps
9 Mbps
14 Mbps
18 Mbps
20 MHz Channel
-86 dBm
-86 dBm
-80 dBm
-73 dBm
-66 dBm
10 MHz Channel
-90 dBm
-90 dBm
-83 dBm
-76 dBm
-66 dBm
5 MHz Channel
-91 dBm
-91 dBm
-86 dBm
-78 dBm
-68 dBm
20 MHz Channel
128
125
119
112
105
10 MHz Channel
132
129
121.6
115.5
104
Modulation
2.4GHz Max.
LOS Link Budget
(no fade margin)
– 20 MHz channel
bandwidth
2.4GHz Max.
LOS Link Budget
(no fade margin)
– 10 MHz channel
bandwidth
2.4GHz Max.
LOS Link Budget
(no fade margin)
– 5 MHz channel
bandwidth
PMP 450 ††
2.4GHz Max.
Aggregate
Throughput with
1/16 Cyclic Prefix
to 1 SM
(75%/25%
DL/UL Ratio) –
RF Link Test
2.4GHz Nominal
Per-Chain
Receive SM RX
Sensitivity
(including FEC) ‡‡
Link Budget,
Integrated (dB)
††
Maximum setting of Max Range parameter is 40 mi.
PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (Vertical/+45) and Channel B (Horizontal/-45). Listed
receive sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings.
‡‡
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-43
PMP 450 Planning Guide
5 MHz Channel
133
130
125
117
107
Table 13 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 3.5GHz
Product
Performance Details
Parameter
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSK-SISO
QPSK-MIMO
16-QAM-MIMO
64-QAM-MIMO
256-QAM-MIMO
with Integrated
SM antenna
11.9 mi / 19.04
km
11.9 mi / 19.04
km
6.1 mi / 9.76 km
2.7 mi / 4.32 km
1.2 mi / 1.92 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 11
dB to SM Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
21.5 mi / 34.4 km
9.6 mi / 15.36 km
4.3 mi / 6.88 km
with Integrated
SM antenna
17.2 mi / 27.52
km
17.2 mi / 27.52
km
6.9 mi / 11.04 km
3.5 mi / 5.6 km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 11
dB to SM Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
24.6 mi / 39.36
km
12.5 mi / 20 km
6.2 mi / 9.92 km
with Integrated
SM antenna
20.9 mi / 33.44
km
20.9 mi / 33.44
km
10.7 mi / 17.12
km
4.8 mi / 7.68 km
1.9 mi / 3.04 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 11
dB to SM Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
38 mi / 60.8 km
17 mi / 27.2 km
6.6 mi / 10.56 km
20 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
13 Mbps
30 Mbps
59 Mbps
96 Mbps
129 Mbps
10 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
6 Mbps
13 Mbps
26 Mbps
42 Mbps
55 Mbps
5 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
2 Mbps
4 Mbps
9 Mbps
14 Mbps
18 Mbps
20 MHz Channel
-87 dBm
-87 dBm
-80 dBm
-73 dBm
-66 dBm
10 MHz Channel
-90 dBm
-90 dBm
-83 dBm
-77 dBm
-70 dBm
5 MHz Channel
-92 dBm
-92 dBm
-86 dBm
-80 dBm
-73 dBm
20 MHz Channel
129.2
129.2
123.3
116.3
109.3
10 MHz Channel
132.4
132.4
124.5
118.6
112.5
Modulation
3.5GHz Max.
LOS Link Budget
(no fade margin)
– 20 MHz channel
bandwidth
3.5GHz Max.
LOS Link Budget
(no fade margin)
– 10 MHz channel
bandwidth
3.5GHz Max.
LOS Link Budget
(no fade margin)
– 5 MHz channel
bandwidth
PMP 450 §§
3.5GHz Max.
Aggregate
Throughput with
1/16 Cyclic Prefix
to 1 SM
(75%/25%
DL/UL Ratio) –
RF Link Test
3.5GHz Nominal
Per-Chain
Receive SM RX
Sensitivity
(including
FEC) ***
Link Budget,
Integrated (dB)
§§
Maximum setting of Max Range parameter is 40 mi.
PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (-45 deg.) and Channel B (+45 deg.). Listed receive
sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings.
***
1-44
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
5 MHz Channel
134.1
134.1
128.3
121.3
113.1
Table 14 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 3.6GHz
Product
Performance Details
Parameter
Modulation
PMP 450 †††
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSK-SISO
QPSK-MIMO
16-QAM-MIMO
64-QAM-MIMO
256-QAM-MIMO
3.6GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no fade
margin) – 20
MHz channel
bandwidth
with Integrated
SM antenna
11.9 mi / 19.04
km
11.9 mi / 19.04
km
6.1 mi / 9.76 km
2.7 mi / 4.32 km
1.2 mi / 1.92 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
21.5 mi / 34.4
km
9.6 mi / 15.36
km
4.3 mi / 6.88 km
3.6GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no fade
margin) – 10
MHz channel
bandwidth
with Integrated
SM antenna
17.2 mi / 27.52
km
17.2 mi / 27.52
km
6.9 mi / 11.04
km
3.5 mi / 5.6 km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
24.6 mi / 39.36
km
12.5 mi / 20 km
6.2 mi / 9.92 km
3.6GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no fade
margin) – 5 MHz
channel
bandwidth
with Integrated
SM antenna
20.9 mi / 33.44
km
20.9 mi / 33.44
km
10.7 mi / 17.12
km
4.8 mi / 7.68 km
1.9 mi / 3.04 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
38 mi / 60.8 km
17 mi / 27.2 km
6.6 mi / 10.56 km
20 MHz
Channel:
(up+down)
13 Mbps
30 Mbps
59 Mbps
96 Mbps
129 Mbps
10 MHz
Channel:
(up+down)
6 Mbps
13 Mbps
26 Mbps
42 Mbps
55 Mbps
5 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
2 Mbps
4 Mbps
9 Mbps
14 Mbps
18 Mbps
20 MHz Channel
-87 dBm
-87 dBm
-80 dBm
-73 dBm
-66 dBm
10 MHz Channel
-90 dBm
-90 dBm
-83 dBm
-77 dBm
-70 dBm
5 MHz Channel
-92 dBm
-92 dBm
-86 dBm
-80 dBm
-73 dBm
20 MHz Channel
129.2
129.2
123.3
116.3
109.3
10 MHz Channel
132.4
132.4
124.5
118.6
112.5
3.6GHz Max.
Aggregate
Throughput
with 1/16 Cyclic
Prefix to 1 SM
(75%/25%
DL/UL Ratio) –
RF Link Test
3.6GHz Nominal
Per-Chain
Receive SM RX
Sensitivity
(including
FEC) ‡‡‡
Link Budget,
Integrated (dB)
†††
1x
Maximum setting of Max Range parameter is 40 mi.
PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (-45 deg.) and Channel B (+45 deg.). Listed receive
sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings.
‡‡‡
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-45
PMP 450 Planning Guide
5 MHz Channel
134.1
134.1
128.3
121.3
113.1
Table 15 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM
Product
Performance Details
Parameter
Modulation
5.4GHz Max. LOS
Link Budget (no fade
margin) – 20 MHz
channel bandwidth
5.4GHz Max. LOS
Link Budget (no fade
margin) – 10 MHz
channel bandwidth
PMP 450 AP §§§****
5.4GHz Max. LOS
Link Budget (no fade
margin) – 5 MHz
channel bandwidth
PMP 430 SM
5.4GHz Max.
Aggregate Throughput
with 1/16 Cyclic
Prefix to 1 SM
(75%/25% DL/UL
Ratio) – RF Link Test
5.4GHz Nominal PerChain Receive SM
RX Sensitivity
(including FEC) ††††
Link Budget,
Integrated (dB)
§§§
1x
2x
3x
QPSK-SISO
16-QAM-SISO
64-QAM-SISO
with Integrated SM
antenna
6.3 mi / 10.08 km
2.9 mi / 4.64 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to SM
Range
7.5 mi / 12 km
3.8 mi / 6.08 km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
5.3 mi / 8.48 km
2.7 mi / 4.32 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to SM
Range
7.5 mi / 12 km
3.4 mi / 5.44 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
6.7 mi / 10.72 km
2.9 mi / 4.64 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to SM
Range
7.5 mi / 12 km
3.4 mi / 5.44 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
20 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
13 Mbps
28 Mbps
48 Mbps
10 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
6 Mbps
12 Mbps
20 Mbps
5 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
2 Mbps
4 Mbps
7 Mbps
20 MHz Channel
-87 dBm
-80 dBm
-74 dBm
10 MHz Channel
-89 dBm
-83 dBm
-77 dBm
5 MHz Channel
-94 dBm
-87 dBm
-80 dBm
20 MHz Channel
127.3
120.4
111.3
10 MHz Channel
125.8
119.8
111.5
5 MHz Channel
127.8
120.4
110.3
Maximum setting of Max Range parameter is 40 mi.
****
Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements.
PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (Vertical) and Channel B (Horizontal). Listed receive
sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings.
††††
1-46
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 16 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM
Product
Performance Details
Parameter
1x
2x
3x
QPSK-SISO
16-QAM-SISO
64-QAM-SISO
with Integrated SM
antenna
9.9 mi / 15.84 km
4.4 mi / 7.04 km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
24.8 mi / 39.68 km
9.3 mi / 14.88 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
12.4 mi / 19.84 km
6.2 mi / 9.92 km
2.4 mi / 3.84 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
35 mi / 56 km
13.5 mi / 21.6 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
19.1 mi / 30.56 km
7.6 mi / 12.16 km
3 mi / 4.8 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
17 mi / 27.2 km
20 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
13 Mbps
28 Mbps
48 Mbps
10 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
6 Mbps
12 Mbps
20 Mbps
5 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
2 Mbps
4 Mbps
7 Mbps
20 MHz Channel
-87 dBm
-80 dBm
-74 dBm
10 MHz Channel
-89 dBm
-83 dBm
-77 dBm
5 MHz Channel
-94 dBm
-87 dBm
-80 dBm
20 MHz Channel
131.8
124.8
116.3
Modulation
5.8GHz Max. LOS
Link Budget (no fade
margin) – 20 MHz
channel bandwidth
5.8GHz Max. LOS
Link Budget (no fade
margin) – 10 MHz
channel bandwidth
PMP 450 AP ‡‡‡‡
5.8GHz Max. LOS
Link Budget (no fade
margin) – 5 MHz
channel bandwidth
PMP 430 SM
5.8GHz Max.
Aggregate Throughput
with 1/16 Cyclic Prefix
to 1 SM (75%/25%
DL/UL Ratio) – RF
Link Test
5.8GHz Nominal PerChain Receive SM RX
Sensitivity (including
FEC) §§§§
Link Budget,
Integrated (dB)
‡‡‡‡
10 MHz Channel
133.8
127.8
119.5
5 MHz Channel
137.5
129.5
121.5
Maximum setting of Max Range parameter is 40 mi.
PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (Vertical) and Channel B (Horizontal). Listed receive
sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings.
§§§§
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-47
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Adaptive modulation
PMP 450 units can transport data over the wireless link using a number of different modulation modes. The
radio automatically selects QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) - SISO, QPSK-MIMO, 16-QAM
(Quadrature Amplitude Modulation) - MIMO, 64-QAM - MIMO, or 256-QAM - MIMO based on the RF
environment to provide 1x, 2x, 4x, 6x and 8x operation.
MIMO
Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) techniques provide protection against fading and increase the
probability that the receiver will decode a usable signal. When the effects of MIMO are combined with those of
OFDM techniques and a high link budget, there is a high probability of a robust connection over a non-line-ofsight path.
The sub-feature that comprises the MIMO technique utilized in the PMP 450 product is:
•
Matrix B: This technique provides for the ability to double the throughput of a radio transmission under
proper RF conditions. Different data streams are transmitted simultaneously on two different antennas.
Cyclic Prefix
OFDM technology uses a cyclic prefix, where a portion of the end of a symbol (slot) is repeated at the
beginning of the symbol (slot) to allow multi-pathing to settle before receiving the desired data. A 1/16 cyclic
prefix means that for every 16 bits of throughput data transmitted, an additional bit is used.
Encryption
The Cambium PMP 450 Series supports optional encryption for data transmitted over the wireless link. The
PMP 450 Series supports the following forms of encryption for security of the wireless link:
•
DES (Data Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses secret 56-bit keys and 8
parity bits. DES performs a series of bit permutations, substitutions, and recombination operations on
blocks of data. DES encryption does not affect the performance or throughput of the system.
•
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses the Rijndael
algorithm and 128-bit keys to establish a higher level of security than DES. AES products are certified as
compliant with the Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS 197) in the U.S.A.
Further reading on wireless operation
For information on planning wireless operation, see the following:
•
1-48
Regulatory planning on page 1-57 describes the regulatory restrictions that affect radio spectrum usage,
such as frequency range.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
System management
This section introduces the PMP 450 management system, including the web interface, installation,
configuration, alerts and upgrades, and management software.
Management agent
PMP 450 equipment is managed through an embedded management agent. Management workstations,
network management systems or PCs can be connected to this agent using the module’s Ethernet port or overthe air (SM).
The management agent supports the following interfaces:
•
Hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP)
•
RADIUS authentication
•
Simple network management protocol (SNMP)
•
Network time protocol (NTP)
•
System logging (Syslog)
•
Wireless Manager (WM) software
•
Canopy Network Updater Tool (CNUT) software
Web server
The PMP 450 management agent contains a web server. The web server supports access via the HTTP
interface..
Web-based management offers a convenient way to manage the PMP 450 equipment from a locally connected
computer or from a network management workstation connected through a management network, without
requiring any special management software. The web-based interfaces are the only interfaces supported for
installation of PMP 450, and for the majority of PMP 450 configuration management tasks.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-49
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Figure 16 AP web-based management screenshot
1-50
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Web pages
The web-based management interfaces provide comprehensive web-based fault, configuration, performance
and security management functions organized into the following web-pages and groups:
Access Point web-pages:
•
Home: The Home web-page reports the general device status, session status, remote subscriber status,
event log information, network interface status, and layer 2 neighbor information.
•
Configuration: The Configuration web-page may be utilized for configuring general device parameters, as
well as IP, radio, SNMP, Quality of Service (QoS), security, time, VLAN, DiffServ, protocol filtering, and
unit settings.
•
Statistics: The Statistics web-page reports detailed operating statistics for the scheduler, SM registration
failures, bridge control block, bridging table, Ethernet, radio, VLAN, data VC, throughput, filter, ARP,
overload, DHCP relay, pass through, and DNS.
•
Tools: The Tools web-page offers useful tools for device installation, configuration, and operation including
link capacity test, frame calculator, subscriber configuration, link status, remote spectrum analyzer,
sessions, and DNS test.
•
Logs: The Logs web-page displays logs related to device operation including AP sessions, AP
authentication state machine, AP authorization state machine, and EAP Radius.
•
Accounts: These web-pages are used to configure device user accounts.
•
Quick Start: The Quick Start web-page provides a walkthrough of configuring radio parameters for initial
operation.
•
Copyright: The Copyright web-page displays pertinent device copyright information.
Subscriber Module web-pages:
•
Home: The Home web-page reports the general device status, event log information, network interface
status, and layer 2 neighbor information.
•
Configuration: The Configuration web-page may be utilized for configuring general device parameters, as
well as IP, radio, SNMP, Quality of Service (QoS), security, VLAN, DiffServ, protocol filtering, NAT,
PPPoE, NAT port mapping, and unit settings.
•
Statistics: The Statistics web-page reports detailed operating statistics for the scheduler, bridge control
block, bridging table, translation table, Ethernet, radio, VLAN, data VC, filter, NAT, NAT DHCP, ARP,
overload, PPPoE, peer information, and DNS.
•
Tools: The Tools web-page offers useful tools for device installation, configuration, and operation including
a spectrum analyzer, alignment configuration and tool, link capacity test, AP evaluation, frame calculator,
BER results, link status, and DNS test.
•
Logs: The Logs web-page displays logs related to device operation including the NAT table, SM session,
SM authentication, SM authorization, PPPoE session, and EAP Radius.
•
Accounts: These web-pages are used to configure device user accounts.
•
PDA: The PDA web-page includes 320 x 240 pixel formatted displays of information important to
installation and alignment for installers using legacy PDA devices. All device web pages are compatible
with touch devices such as smart phones and tablets.
•
Copyright: The Copyright web-page displays pertinent device copyright information.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-51
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Identity-based user accounts
When identity-based user accounts are configured, a security officer can define from one to four user accounts,
each of which may have one of the four possible roles:
•
ADMINISTRATOR, who has full read and write permissions. This is the level of the root and admin
users, as well as any other administrator accounts that one of them creates.
•
INSTALLER, who has permissions identical to those of ADMINISTRATOR except that the installer
cannot add or delete users or change the password of any other user.
•
TECHNICIAN, who has permissions to modify basic radio parameters and view informational web pages
•
GUEST, who has no write permissions and only a limited view of General Status tab
See Table 57 Identity-based user account permissions - AP on page 1-129 and Table 58 Identity-based user
account permissions - SM on page 1-131 for detailed information on account permissions.
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS)
The PMP 450 system includes support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service) protocol
functionality including:
•
Authentication: Allows only known SMs onto the network (blocking “rogue” SMs), and can be configured
to ensure SMs are connecting to a known network (preventing SMs from connecting to “rogue” APs).
RADIUS authentication is used for SMs, but not used for APs.
•
SM Configuration: Configures authenticated SMs with MIR (Maximum Information Rate), High Priority,
and VLAN (Virtual LAN) parameters from the RADIUS server when an SM registers to an AP.
•
SM Accounting provides support for RADIUS accounting messages for usage-based billing. This
accounting includes indications for subscriber session establishment, subscriber session disconnection, and
bandwidth usage per session for each SM that connects to the AP.
•
Centralized AP and SM user name and password management: Allows AP and SM usernames and access
levels (Administrator, Installer, Technician) to be centrally administered in the RADIUS server instead of
on each radio and tracks access events (logon/logoff) for each username on the RADIUS server. This
accounting does not track and report specific configuration actions performed on radios or pull statistics
such as bit counts from the radios. Such functions require an Element Management System (EMS) such as
Cambium Wireless Manager. This accounting is not the ability to perform accounting functions on the
subscriber/end user/customer account.
•
Framed-IP-Address: Operators may use a RADIUS server to assign management IP addressing to SM
modules.
SNMP
•
1-52
The management agent supports fault and performance management by means of an SNMP interface. The
management agent is compatible with SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c using 5 Management Information Base
(MIB) files which are available for download from the Cambium Networks Support website
(https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/pmp450).
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
The clock supplies accurate date and time information to the system. It can be set to run with or without a
connection to a network time server (NTP). It can be configured to display local time by setting the time zone
and daylight saving in the Time web page.
If an NTP server connection is available, the clock can be set to synchronize with the server time at regular
intervals.
PMP 450 devices may receive NTP data from a CMM3 or CMM4 module, an NTP server configured in the
system’s management network or a UGPS module.
The Time Zone option is configurable on the AP’s Time Configuration page, and may be used to offset the
received NTP time to match the operator’s local time zone. When set on the AP, the offset will be set for the
entire sector (SMs will be notified of the current Time Zone upon initial registration). If a Time Zone change is
applied, the SMs will be notified of the change in a best effort fashion, meaning some SMs may not pick up the
change until the next re-registration. Time Zone changes are noted in the Event Log of the AP and SM.
An AP which is receiving NTP date and time information from an NTP server or from a GPS synchronization
source may be used as an NTP server. Any client which has IP connectivity to the AP may request NTP date
and time information from the AP. No additional configuration (other than the AP receiving valid NTP data)
is required to use the AP as an NTP server.
Wireless Manager (WM)
Cambium Networks Wireless Manager 4.0 is recommended for managing PMP 450 networks. You can achieve
better uptime through better visibility of your network with the Cambium Wireless Manager. This network
management software tool offers breakthrough map-based visualization capabilities using embedded Google
maps, and combined with advanced configuration, provisioning, alerting and reporting features you can
control your entire outdoor wireless network including Mesh Wide Area Network, and Point-to-Multipoint and
Point-to-Point solutions as well as other SNMP enabled devices. With its powerful user interface you will not
only be able to control your network's access, distribution and backhaul layers, but you will also have visibility
to WLAN sites and be able to quickly launch indoor network management systems.
Some key features of Wireless Manager are:
•
Template-Based Configuration: With Wireless Manager's user-defined templates you can accelerate the
process for the configuration of the devices you add to your network resulting in quicker and easier
deployments. The template-based functionality provides an automated way to configure large numbers of
network devices with just a few mouse clicks, and can be scheduled to occur at any time via Wireless
Manager's Task Scheduler.
•
Ultralight Thin Client: With the growing mobile workforce it is important to have access to the status of
your network at any time. With Wireless Manager you can view the status and performance of your entire
wireless network via a compact web interface accessible by your smart phone.
•
Map-Based Visualization: Wireless Manager overlays sophisticated real-time information about your
network elements onto building layouts and dynamic Google maps. Visuals can be scaled to view an entire
city or building or a specific area, floor or link.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-53
PMP 450 Planning Guide
•
High Availability Architecture Support: Wireless Manager offers a high availability option, providing a
highly reliable and redundant network management solution that ensures you always have management
access to your network.
•
High Scalability: The enhanced Wireless Manager offers you server scalability with support for up to 10,000
nodes as well as support for distributed server architecture.
Cambium’s Wireless Manager 4.0 available for download at:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/management-tools/wireless-manager/
Canopy Network Updater Tool (CNUT)
CNUT (Canopy Network Updater Tool) is the stand-alone software update tool for PMP 450 Series products.
The Canopy Network Updater Tool:
•
automatically discovers all network elements
•
executes a UDP command that initiates and terminates the Auto-update mode within APs. This command
is both secure and convenient:
o For security, the AP accepts this command from only the IP address that you specify in the
Configuration page of the AP.
•
•
For convenience, Network Updater automatically sets this Configuration parameter in the APs to the
IP address of the Network Updater server when the server performs any of the update commands.
allows you to choose among updating
your entire network.
only elements that you select.
only network branches that you select.
provides a Script Engine that you can use with any script that
o you define.
Cambium supplies.
CNUT is available at http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/management-tools/cnut/
Capacity upgrades
Capacity upgrades are supplied as an access key purchased from your Cambium Point-to-Multipoint
distributor or solutions provider. The upgrade is applied by entering the supplied URL in a PMP 450 moduleconnected web browser address bar.
Software upgrade
CNUT (Canopy Network Updater Tool) is the stand-alone software update tool for PMP 450 Series products.
CNUT is available at http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/management-tools/cnut/
1-54
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Further reading on system management
For more information on system management, see
•
Security planning on page 1-128 describes how to plan for PMP 450 links to operate in secure modes.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-55
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Chapter 1:
Planning considerations
This chapter provides information to help the user to plan a PMP 450 network.
The following topics are described in this chapter:
1-56
•
Regulatory planning on page 1-57 describes how to plan PMP 450 links to conform to the regulatory
restrictions that apply in the country of operation.
•
Network migration planning on page 1-58 presents migration scenarios to aid in planning a network
deployment
•
Site planning on page 1-67 describes factors to be considered when choosing sites for the equipment
•
Link planning on page 1-68 describes factors to be taken into account when planning links, such as range,
path loss and throughput.
•
Analyzing the RF Environment on page 1-95 describes how to map RF neighbor frequencies, anticipate
reflection, assess RF obstructions in the Fresnel Zone, and plan channel usage.
•
Selecting Sites for Network Elements on page 1-103 describes how to survey sites, find expected coverage
areas, clear the radio horizon, and calculate aim angles.
•
Diagramming Network Layouts on page 1-106 includes tips on how to avoid self-interference as well as
interference from external sources.
•
Grounding and lightning protection on page 1-108 discusses wiring standards, the need for surge
protection, lightning protection zones, and general protection requirements.
•
Configuration options for TDD synchronization on page 1-116 covers the importance of GPS
synchronization as well as planning for installation
•
Data network planning on page 1-120 discusses IP networking and other networking features provided
with the PMP 450 product
•
Security planning on page 1-128 can be referenced for information regarding security features of the
product.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Regulatory planning
This section describes how to plan PMP 450 links to conform to the regulatory restrictions that apply in the
country of operation.
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the PMP product is operated in accordance with local
regulatory limits.
Contact the applicable radio regulator to find out whether or not registration of the PMP network is required.
Obeying Regulatory limits
The local regulator may restrict frequency usage and channel width, and may limit the amount of conducted or
radiated transmitter power. Some countries impose conducted power limits on products operating in the 2.4
GHz, 3.5GHz, 3.6GHz, 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz bands. For detailed information, see Compliance with radio
regulations on page 3-16.
Conforming to the limits
Ensure the system is configured to conform to local regulatory requirements by setting the appropriate
Country Code setting on the APs and SMs in the network. When using connectorized APs with external
antennas, the regulations may require the maximum transmit power to be reduced. To ensure that regulatory
requirements are met for connectorized installations, see Calculating maximum power level for connectorized
AP units on page 1-93.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-57
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Network migration planning
The PMP 450 Series offers current network operators the ability to migrate to PMP 450 for expanded network
capacity and capability. The following sections are provided to aid in establishing a planning framework for
deploying a PMP 450 system.
Example PMP 450 deployment scenario
The following sections detail example network deployment scenarios for the PMP 450 product. This table may
be referenced to begin planning the PMP 450 deployment based on the current network configuration (if
applicable).
Definitions of deployment scenario terminology
Table 17 Deployment scenario terminology descriptions
Term
Definition
Existing System Release
The current running system software release
Existing Number of Sectors
The total number of AP sectors co-located in the current
system
Existing Modulation
The type of modulation used in the current network. “FSK”
indicates an existing PMP 1x0 series network, and “OFDM”
indicates an existing PMP 430 network.
The current deployment’s usage of frequency across tower
sectors. For example, in a six AP sector deployment, the
following represents an ABC frequency re-use pattern.
Existing Frequency Re-use Pattern
•
Sector 1 (A): 5740
•
Sector 2 (B): 5760
•
Sector 3 (C): 5780
•
Sector 4 (A): 5740
•
Sector 5 (B): 5760
•
Sector 6 (C): 5780
The deployment scenarios define their own customized
examples of frequency re-use patterns.
For multiple AP cluster deployments, see Multiple OFDM
Access Point Clusters on page 1-98
1-58
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Term
Definition
Existing Ch BW (MHz)
The channel size, or channel bandwidth used in the current
system. For FSK (PMP 1x0 series) deployments, the channel
bandwidth is always 20 MHz (except 900 MHz FSK, which
operate with 8 MHz channel bandwidth). For OFDM (PMP
430) deployments, the channel size may be 5, 10, or 20 MHz.
Existing Total Bandwidth Used (MHz)
The total amount of spectrum, in MHz, which is used by the
existing system.
Existing Aggregate Tower Throughput
(Mbps)
The total amount of throughput, in Mbps, available in the
current network deployment.
Existing Additional Frequencies Available
(MHz)
The number of additional frequencies unused by the current
deployment that are available for usage by PMP 450
equipment.
FINAL: Aggregate Throughput (Mbps)
The aggregate throughput available after upgrading to a PMP
450 network.
Resulting Number of Sectors
The number of sectors configured in the new PMP 450 network
installation.
Resulting Modulation
The modulation scheme utilized in the new PMP 450 network
installation.
Resulting Frequency Re-use Pattern
The new frequency re-use pattern utilized in the new PMP 450
network installation. Each deployment scenario in this section
includes a custom example of a frequency re-use plan.
Resulting Ch BW (MHz)
The resulting channel bandwidth configured in the PMP 450
system.
Resulting Total Bandwidth Used (MHz)
The total amount of spectrum which is used by the existing
system.
Resulting Aggregate Tower Throughput
(Mbps)
The aggregate throughput available after upgrading to a PMP
450 network.
Resulting Percentage Increase in Aggregate
Tower Throughput
The amount of increase in tower (all sectors) throughput after
upgrading to a PMP 450 network.
Total Bandwidth Used (During Migration)
(MHz)
The total amount of spectrum (in MHz) used when migrating
to a PMP 450 deployments.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-59
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Sector capacity
The following table exhibits the maximum aggregate sector throughput for several Cambium network
deployments. This table may be used as a reference for planning new networks or for planning network
upgrades.
Table 18 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – FSK (PMP 1x0 Series)
Air Interface
Rate
Adapt
Ch BW
(MHz)
Cyclic
Prefix
Maximum Aggregate
Sector Throughput RF Link Test (Mbps)
FSK (PMP 1x0 Series – 900 MHz)
1x
N/A
2.4
FSK (PMP 1x0 Series – 900 MHz)
2x
N/A
4.8
FSK (PMP 1x0 Series)
1x
20
N/A
FSK (PMP 1x0 Series)
2x
20
N/A
14
Table 19 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – OFDM (PMP 430 Series)
1-60
Air Interface
Rate
Adapt
Ch BW
(MHz)
Cyclic
Prefix
Maximum Aggregate
Sector Throughput RF Link Test (Mbps)
OFDM (PMP 430 Series)
1x
CP 1/16
3.5
OFDM (PMP 430 Series)
2x
CP 1/16
OFDM (PMP 430 Series)
3x
CP 1/16
10.5
OFDM (PMP 430 Series)
1x
10
CP 1/16
7.5
OFDM (PMP 430 Series)
2x
10
CP 1/16
15
OFDM (PMP 430 Series)
3x
10
CP 1/16
22.5
OFDM (PMP 430 Series)
1x
20
CP 1/16
16.5
OFDM (PMP 430 Series)
2x
20
CP 1/16
32
OFDM (PMP 430 Series)
3x
20
CP 1/16
45+
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 20 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – OFDM MIMO (PMP 450 Series)
Air Interface
Rate
Adapt
Ch BW
(MHz)
Cyclic
Prefix
Maximum Aggregate
Sector Throughput RF Link Test (Mbps)
OFDM (SISO) (PMP 450 Series)
1x
CP 1/16
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series)
2x
CP 1/16
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series)
4x
CP 1/16
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series)
6x
CP 1/16
14
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series)
8x
CP 1/16
18
OFDM (SISO) (PMP 450 Series)
1x
10
CP 1/16
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series)
2x
10
CP 1/16
13
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series)
4x
10
CP 1/16
26
10
CP 1/16
42
10
CP 1/16
55
20
CP 1/16
13
20
CP 1/16
30
20
CP 1/16
60
20
CP 1/16
98
20
CP 1/16
128
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series)
OFDM (SISO) (PMP 450 Series)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series)
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
6x
8x
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
1-61
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 21 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM
Air Interface
Rate
Adapt
Ch BW
(MHz)
Cyclic
Prefix
Maximum Aggregate
Sector Throughput RF Link Test (Mbps)
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM)
1x
CP 1/16
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM)
2x
CP 1/16
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM)
3x
CP 1/16
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM)
1x
10
CP 1/16
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM)
2x
10
CP 1/16
12
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM)
3x
10
CP 1/16
20
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM)
1x
20
CP 1/16
13
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM)
2x
20
CP 1/16
28
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM)
3x
20
CP 1/16
48
Deployment scenario 1 – Replacing PMP 100 Equipment (20 MHz
Channel Bandwidth)
Deployment scenario 1 assumes that the existing network comprises of PMP 1x0 equipment (i.e. PMP 100,
PMP 120, etc.) with the configuration listed below in Table 22. The migration in this scenario results in a
complete replacement of PMP 1x0 series equipment with PMP 450 equipment.
Scenario 1 assumes that neighbouring frequencies are free and that a guard band is not required at the edges of
the spectrum used for transmission.
Table 22 Deployment scenario 1
1-62
Term
Definition
Existing System Release
12.1
Existing Number of Sectors
Existing Modulation
FSK
Existing Frequency Re-use Pattern
ABC ABC
Existing Ch BW (MHz)
20
Existing Aggregate Tower Throughput (Mbps)
84
Existing Total Bandwidth Used (MHz)
60
Existing Additional Frequencies Available (MHz)
10
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Term
Definition
Replace Legacy Subscribers with 450 SMs
Required
Resulting Number of Sectors
Resulting Modulation
OFDM (MIMO)
Resulting Frequency Re-use Pattern
ABC ABC
Resulting Ch BW (MHz)
20
Resulting Total Bandwidth Used (MHz)
60
Resulting Aggregate Tower Throughput (Mbps)
570
Resulting Percentage Increase in Aggregate Tower Throughput
679%
Table 23 Scenario 1 spectrum usage
Beginning
frequency usage
Resulting frequency usage (assuming
no interference at band edges)
5725
5730
5735
5740
FSK (A)
MIMO (A) 5.740 GHz
FSK (B)
MIMO (B) 5.760 GHz
FSK (C)
MIMO (C) 5.780 GHz
5745
5750
5755
5760
5765
5770
5775
5780
5785
5790
5795
5800
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-63
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Deployment scenario 1 migration procedure
This procedure assumes that there are no temporary frequencies available and that the PMP 450 APs will
replace the existing APs.
Procedure 1a Deployment scenario 1 migration procedure
1-64
Identify proximity to potential system interferers by running a spectrum analysis scan where the
PMP 450 equipment will be deployed. It is recommended to run this scan at several different times
of day and night
Record relevant AP and SM configuration parameters within the current operating network, if
applicable, including:
•
authentication, and authorization parameters
•
frequency configuration
•
data network configuration
•
RF statistics
•
security configuration
Configure the PMP 450 AP and SMs for deployment
Install the PMP 450 AP
Install the PMP 450 MIMO(frequency A) SMs – powered on
Verify SM registration, link quality, and link performance.
Continue installation for frequency B sector and frequency C sector.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Deployment scenario 2 – Replacing PMP 430 equipment (10 MHz
Channel Bandwidth)
Deployment scenario 2 assumes that the existing network is comprised of PMP 430 equipment with the
configuration listed below in Table 24. The migration in this scenario results in a complete replacement of
PMP 430 series equipment with PMP 450 equipment.
Table 24 Deployment scenario 2
Term
Definition
Existing System Release
12.2.2
Existing Number of Sectors
Existing Modulation
OFDM
Existing Frequency Re-use Pattern
ABC ABC
Existing Ch BW (MHz)
10
Existing Aggregate Tower Throughput (Mbps)
135
Existing Total Bandwidth Used (MHz)
30
Existing Additional Frequencies Available (MHz)
Replace Legacy Subscribers with 450 SMs
Optional (PMP 430 Interop enables
PMP 430 SMs to register to PMP
450 AP)
Resulting Number of Sectors
Resulting Modulation
OFDM (MIMO)
Resulting Frequency Re-use Pattern
ABC ABC
Resulting Ch BW (MHz)
10
Resulting Total Bandwidth Used (MHz)
30
Resulting Aggregate Tower Throughput (Mbps)
234
Resulting Percentage Increase in Aggregate Tower Throughput
173%
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-65
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 25 Deployment scenario 2 spectrum usage
Beginning PMP 430
frequency usage
Resulting PMP 450 frequency usage
5725
5730
5735
5740
OFDM (A)
MIMO (A) 5.740 GHz
OFDM (B)
MIMO (B) 5.750 GHz
OFDM (C)
MIMO (C) 5.760 GHz
5745
5750
5755
5760
5765
5770
Deployment scenario 2 migration procedure
This procedure assumes that there are no temporary frequencies available and that the PMP 450 APs will
replace the existing APs.
Procedure 2 Deployment scenario 2 migration procedure
1-66
Identify proximity to potential system interferers by running a spectrum analysis scan where the
PMP 450 equipment will be deployed. It is recommended to run this scan at several different times
of day and night
Record relevant AP and SM configuration parameters within the current operating network, if
applicable, including:
•
authentication, and authorization parameters
•
frequency configuration
•
data network configuration
•
RF statistics
•
security configuration
Configure the PMP 450 AP and SMs for deployment
Install the PMP 450 AP (frequency A)
Install the PMP 450 MIMO (frequency A) SMs – powered on
Verify SM registration, link quality, and link performance.
Continue installation for frequency B sector and frequency C sector.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Site planning
This section describes factors to be taken into account when choosing sites for the AP or SM, power supplies,
CMM4 (if applicable) and GPS antenna (if applicable).
AP or SM site selection
When selecting a site for the AP or SM, consider the following factors:
•
Height and location to ensure that people are kept away from the antenna; see Calculated distances and
power compliance margins on page 3-14.
•
Height and location to achieve the best radio path.
•
Ability to meet the requirements specified in Grounding and lightning protection on page 1-108.
•
Aesthetics and planning permission issues.
•
Cable lengths; see Maximum cable lengths on page 1-67.
•
The effect of strong winds on the installation; see Wind loading on page 1-68.
Power supply site selection
When selecting a site for the AP or SM power supply, consider the following factors:
•
Indoor location with no possibility of condensation.
•
Availability of a mains electricity supply.
•
Accessibility for viewing status indicator LED and connecting Ethernet cables.
•
Cable lengths; see Maximum cable lengths on page 1-67.
Maximum cable lengths
When installing PMP 450 Series APs or SMs, the maximum permitted length of the shielded copper Ethernet
interface cable is 330 feet (100m) from AP/SM to their associated power supplies or CMM4.
When receiving synchronization signalling from a UGPS module, see table below for maximum
synchronization cable lengths.
Table 26 Sync cable length specification
Configuration
Maximum Cable
Length (feet)
Maximum Cable
Length (meters)
UGPS powered via external power source
330
100
UGPS powered via PMP 450 AP (via AP
sync port)
130
40
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-67
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Wind loading
Ensure that the site will not be prone to excessive wind loading.
Antennas and equipment mounted on towers or buildings will subject the mounting structure to significant
lateral forces when there is appreciable wind. Antennas are normally specified by the amount of force (in
pounds) for specific wind strengths. The magnitude of the force depends on both the wind strength and size of
the antenna.
Calculation of lateral force (metric)
The magnitude of the lateral force can be estimated from:
Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2
Where:
Is:
surface area in square meters
wind speed in meters per second
The lateral force produced by a single PMP 450 at different wind speeds is shown in Table 27 Lateral force metric and Table 28 Lateral force - US.
Table 27 Lateral force - metric
Largest
surface area (square meters)
1-68
Lateral force (Kg) at wind speed
(meters per second)
30
40
50
60
70
.066 (AP – 5 GHz, 60 Degree Sector)
11
17
25
34
.083 (AP – 5 GHz, 90 Degree Sector)
14
22
31
43
.27 (AP – 2.4 GHz, 60 Degree Sector)
25
45
71
102
138
.088 (AP – 3.5 GHz, 90 Degree Sector)
14
22
33
45
.088 (AP – 3.6 GHz, 90 Degree Sector)
14
22
33
45
.0027 (SM)
0.25
0.45
0.7
1.4
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Calculation of lateral force (US)
The magnitude of the lateral force can be estimated from:
Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2
Where:
Is:
surface area in square feet
wind speed in miles per hour
The lateral force produced by a single PMP 450 unit at different wind speeds is shown in Table 28.
Table 28 Lateral force - US
Largest surface area (square
feet)
Lateral force (lb) at wind speed
(miles per hour)
80
100
120
140
150
0.71 (AP – 5 GHz, 60 Degree Sector)
19
30
43
58
67
0.89 (AP – 5 GHz, 90 Degree Sector)
24
37
54
73
84
2.9 (AP – 2.4 GHz, 60 Degree Sector)
78
122
175
239
274
0.94 (AP – 3.5 GHz, 90 Degree Sector)
25
40
57
77
89
0.94 (AP – 3.6 GHz, 90 Degree Sector)
25
40
57
77
89
0.29 (SM)
7.8
12
18
23
27
Capabilities of the PMP 450 Series
The structure and mounting brackets of the AP are capable of withstanding wind speeds up to:
•
190 kph (118 mph) – 5 GHz Sector Antennas
•
216 kph (135 mph) – 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz Sector Antennas
Ensure that the structure to which the AP is fixed to is also capable of withstanding the prevalent wind speeds
and loads.
The structure and mounting brackets of the SM are capable of withstanding wind speeds up to 190 kph (118
mph). Ensure that the structure to which the SM is fixed to is also capable of withstanding the prevalent wind
speeds and loads.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-69
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Wind speed statistics
Contact the national meteorological office for the country concerned to identify the likely wind speeds
prevalent at the proposed location. Use this data to estimate the total wind loading on the support structures.
Sources of information:
1-70
•
US National Weather Service, http://www.nws.noaa.gov/
•
UK Meteorological Office, www.meto.gov.uk
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Link planning
This section describes factors to be taken into account when planning links, such as range, obstacles, path loss
and throughput.
Range and obstacles
Calculate the range of the link and identify any obstacles that may affect radio performance.
Perform a survey to identify all the obstructions (such as trees or buildings) in the path and to assess the risk of
interference. This information is necessary in order to achieve an accurate link feasibility assessment.
The PMP 450 Series is designed to operate in Near-Line-of-Sight (nLOS), Non-Line-of-Sight (NLOS) and Lineof-Sight (LOS) environments. An NLOS environment is one in which there is no optical line-of-sight, that is,
there are obstructions between the antennas. See Figure 1 Line Of Sight Diagram.
OFDM technology can often use multi-pathing to an advantage to overcome nLOS, especially in cases where
the Fresnel zone is only partially blocked by buildings, “urban canyons”, or foliage. OFDM tends to help
especially when obstacles are near the middle of the link, and less so when the obstacles are very near the SM or
AP.
However, attenuation through walls and trees is substantial for any use of the 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz, 5.4
GHz, and 5.8 GHz frequency bands. Even with OFDM, these products should not be expected to penetrate
walls or extensive trees and foliage.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-71
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 29 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSK-SISO
QPSK-MIMO-B
16QAM-MIMO-B
64QAM-MIMO-B
256QAMMIMO-B
with Integrated
SM antenna
8.5 mi / 13.6 km
6 mi / 9.6 km
2.7 mi / 4.32 km
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with CLIP that
adds 8 dB to SM
Range
24.1 mi / 38.56
km
17 mi / 27.2 km
7.7 mi / 12.32 km
3.1 mi / 4.96 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
with LENS that
adds 5.5 dB to
SM Range
15.2 mi / 24.32
km
10.8 mi / 17.28
km
4.9 mi / 7.84 km
2 mi / 3.2 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 14
dB to SM Range
40 mi / 64 km
30.3 mi / 48.48
km
13.7 mi / 21.92 km
5.6 mi / 8.96 km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
with Integrated
SM antenna
4.8 mi / 7.68 km
3.4 mi / 5.44 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with CLIP that
adds 8 dB to SM
Range
13.5 mi / 21.6
km
9.6 mi / 15.36 km
4.3 mi / 6.88 km
1.8 mi / 2.88 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
with LENS that
adds 5.5 dB to
SM Range
8.5 mi / 13.6 km
6 mi / 9.6 km
2.7 mi / 4.32 km
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 14
dB to SM Range
24.1 mi / 38.56
km
17 mi / 27.2 km
7.7 mi / 12.32 km
3.1 mi / 4.96 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
with Integrated
SM antenna
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that
adds 8 dB to SM
Range
4.3 mi / 6.88 km
3 mi / 4.8 km
1.4 mi / 2.24 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with LENS that
adds 5.5 dB to
SM Range
2.7 mi / 4.32 km
1.9 mi / 3.04 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 14
dB to SM Range
7.6 mi / 12.16
km
5.4 mi / 8.64 km
2.4 mi / 3.84 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Integrated
SM antenna
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that
adds 8 dB to SM
Range
1.4 mi / 2.24 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with LENS that
adds 5.5 dB to
SM Range
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 14
dB to SM Range
2.4 mi / 3.84 km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
0.8 mi / 1.28 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
Modulation
5.8GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no fade
margin)
5.8GHz Max.
nLOS Link
Budget
(additional 5 dB
link loss)
PMP 450
5.8GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget
(additional 15
dB link loss)
5.8GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget
(additional 25
dB link loss)
1-72
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 30 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
Modulation
5.8GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no
fade margin)
5.8GHz Max.
nLOS Link
Budget
(additional 5
dB link loss)
PMP 450
5.8GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget
(additional 15
dB link loss)
5.8GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget
(additional 25
dB link loss)
with Integrated
SM antenna
with CLIP that
adds 9 dB to SM
Range
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
with Reflector
Dish that adds 14
dB to SM Range
with Integrated
SM antenna
with CLIP that
adds 9 dB to SM
Range
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
with Reflector
Dish that adds 14
dB to SM Range
with Integrated
SM antenna
with CLIP that
adds 9 dB to SM
Range
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
with Reflector
Dish that adds 14
dB to SM Range
with Integrated
SM antenna
with CLIP that
adds 9 dB to SM
Range
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
with Reflector
Dish that adds 14
dB to SM Range
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
256QAMMIMO-B
0.5 mi / 0.8
km
QPSK-SISO
QPSK-MIMO-B
16QAM-MIMO-B
64QAM-MIMO-B
11.7 mi /
18.72 km
8.3 mi / 13.28 km
3.6 mi / 5.76 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
32.9 mi /
52.64 km
23.3 mi / 37.28
km
10.3 mi / 16.48 km
4.1 mi / 6.56 km
1.3 mi / 2.08
km
20.7 mi /
33.12 km
14.7 mi / 23.52
km
6.5 mi / 10.4 km
2.6 mi / 4.16 km
0.8 mi / 1.28
km
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
18.3 mi / 29.28 km
7.3 mi / 11.68 km
2.3 mi / 3.68
km
6.6 mi / 10.56
km
4.6 mi / 7.36 km
2 mi / 3.2 km
0.8 mi / 1.28 km
0.3 mi / 0.48
km
18.5 mi / 29.6
km
13.1 mi / 20.96
km
5.8 mi / 9.28 km
2.3 mi / 3.68 km
0.7 mi / 1.12
km
11.7 mi /
18.72 km
8.3 mi / 13.28 km
3.6 mi / 5.76 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
0.5 mi / 0.8
km
32.9 mi /
52.64 km
23.3 mi / 37.28
km
10.3 mi / 16.48 km
4.1 mi / 6.56 km
1.3 mi / 2.08
km
2.1 mi / 3.36
km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.1 mi / 0.16
km
5.8 mi / 9.28
km
4.1 mi / 6.56 km
1.8 mi / 2.88 km
0.7 mi / 1.12 km
0.2 mi / 0.32
km
3.7 mi / 5.92
km
2.6 mi / 4.16 km
1.2 mi / 1.92 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
0.1 mi / 0.16
km
10.4 mi /
16.64 km
7.4 mi / 11.84 km
3.2 mi / 5.12 km
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.4 mi / 0.64
km
0.7 mi / 1.12
km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16
km
1.8 mi / 2.88
km
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16
km
1.2 mi / 1.92
km
0.8 mi / 1.28 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16
km
3.3 mi / 5.28
km
2.3 mi / 3.68 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.1 mi / 0.16
km
1-73
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 31 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSK-SISO
QPSK-MIMO-B
16QAM-MIMO-B
64QAM-MIMO-B
256QAMMIMO-B
with Integrated
SM antenna
14.5 mi / 23.2
km
10.3 mi / 16.48
km
5.1 mi / 8.16 km
2.2 mi / 3.52 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
with CLIP that
adds 8 dB to
SM Range
40 mi / 64 km
28.9 mi / 46.24
km
14.3 mi / 22.88 km
6.3 mi / 10.08 km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
with LENS that
adds 5.5 dB to
SM Range
25.8 mi / 41.28
km
18.3 mi / 29.28
km
9 mi / 14.4 km
4 mi / 6.4 km
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
14 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
25.5 mi / 40.8 km
11.3 mi / 18.08
km
3 mi / 4.8 km
with Integrated
SM antenna
8.2 mi / 13.12
km
5.8 mi / 9.28 km
2.9 mi / 4.64 km
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with CLIP that
adds 8 dB to
SM Range
23 mi / 36.8 km
16.3 mi / 26.08
km
8.1 mi / 12.96 km
3.6 mi / 5.76 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
with LENS that
adds 5.5 dB to
SM Range
14.5 mi / 23.2
km
10.3 mi / 16.48
km
5.1 mi / 8.16 km
2.2 mi / 3.52 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
14 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
28.9 mi / 46.24
km
14.3 mi / 22.88 km
6.3 mi / 10.08 km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
with Integrated
SM antenna
2.6 mi / 4.16 km
1.8 mi / 2.88 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that
adds 8 dB to
SM Range
7.3 mi / 11.68
km
5.1 mi / 8.16 km
2.6 mi / 4.16 km
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with LENS that
adds 5.5 dB to
SM Range
4.6 mi / 7.36 km
3.2 mi / 5.12 km
1.6 mi / 2.56 km
0.7 mi / 1.12 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
14 dB to SM
Range
12.9 mi / 20.64
km
9.2 mi / 14.72 km
4.5 mi / 7.2 km
2 mi / 3.2 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
with Integrated
SM antenna
0.8 mi / 1.28 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that
adds 8 dB to
SM Range
2.3 mi / 3.68 km
1.6 mi / 2.56 km
0.8 mi / 1.28 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with LENS that
adds 5.5 dB to
SM Range
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
14 dB to SM
Range
4.1 mi / 6.56 km
2.9 mi / 4.64 km
1.4 mi / 2.24 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
Modulation
5.8GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no
fade margin)
5.8GHz Max.
nLOS Link
Budget
(additional 5
dB link loss)
PMP 450
5.8GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget
(additional 15
dB link loss)
5.8GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget
(additional 25
dB link loss)
1-74
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 32 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSK-SISO
QPSK-MIMO-B
16QAM-MIMOB
64QAM-MIMOB
256QAMMIMO-B
with Integrated SM
antenna
4.8 mi / 7.68
km
3.4 mi / 5.44 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
0.7 mi / 1.12 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with CLIP that adds
8 dB to SM Range
8.2 mi / 13.12
km
5.8 mi / 9.28 km
2.6 mi / 4.16 km
1.2 mi / 1.92 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
8.2 mi / 13.12
km
5.8 mi / 9.28 km
2.6 mi / 4.16 km
1.2 mi / 1.92 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
8.2 mi / 13.12
km
5.8 mi / 9.28 km
2.6 mi / 4.16 km
1.2 mi / 1.92 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
2.7 mi / 4.32
km
1.9 mi / 3.04 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that adds
8 dB to SM Range
4.6 mi / 7.36
km
3.3 mi / 5.28 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
4.6 mi / 7.36
km
3.3 mi / 5.28 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
4.6 mi / 7.36
km
3.3 mi / 5.28 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
0.9 mi / 1.44
km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that adds
8 dB to SM Range
1.5 mi / 2.4
km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
1.5 mi / 2.4
km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
1.5 mi / 2.4
km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
0.3 mi / 0.48
km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that adds
8 dB to SM Range
0.5 mi / 0.8
km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
0.5 mi / 0.8
km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
0.5 mi / 0.8
km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
Modulation
5.4GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no fade
margin)
5.4GHz Max.
nLOS Link
Budget
(additional 5 dB
link loss)
PMP
450 *****
5.4GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget
(additional 15
dB link loss)
5.4GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget
(additional 25
dB link loss)
*****
Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-75
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 33 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSK-SISO
QPSK-MIMO-B
16QAM-MIMOB
64QAM-MIMOB
256QAMMIMO-B
with Integrated
SM antenna
4.3 mi / 6.88 km
3.1 mi / 4.96 km
1.6 mi / 2.56 km
0.7 mi / 1.12 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with CLIP that
adds 8 dB to SM
Range
7.5 mi / 12 km
5.3 mi / 8.48 km
2.4 mi / 3.84 km
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
7.5 mi / 12 km
5.3 mi / 8.48 km
2.4 mi / 3.84 km
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 14
dB to SM Range
7.5 mi / 12 km
5.3 mi / 8.48 km
2.4 mi / 3.84 km
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Integrated
SM antenna
2.4 mi / 3.84 km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that
adds 8 dB to SM
Range
4.2 mi / 6.72 km
3 mi / 4.8 km
1.4 mi / 2.24 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
4.2 mi / 6.72 km
3 mi / 4.8 km
1.4 mi / 2.24 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 14
dB to SM Range
4.2 mi / 6.72 km
3 mi / 4.8 km
1.4 mi / 2.24 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with Integrated
SM antenna
0.8 mi / 1.28 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that
adds 8 dB to SM
Range
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 14
dB to SM Range
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Integrated
SM antenna
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that
adds 8 dB to SM
Range
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 14
dB to SM Range
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
Modulation
5.4GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no fade
margin)
5.4GHz Max.
nLOS Link
Budget
(additional 5 dB
link loss)
PMP
450 †††††
5.4GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget
(additional 15
dB link loss)
5.4GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget
(additional 25
dB link loss)
†††††
Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements.
1-76
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 34 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSK-SISO
QPSK-MIMO-B
16QAM-MIMOB
64QAM-MIMOB
256QAMMIMO-B
with Integrated
SM antenna
4 mi / 6.4 km
2.8 mi / 4.48 km
1.4 mi / 2.24 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that
adds 8 dB to SM
Range
7.3 mi / 11.68 km
5.2 mi / 8.32 km
2.3 mi / 3.68 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
7.1 mi / 11.36 km
5 mi / 8 km
2.3 mi / 3.68 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 14
dB to SM Range
7.3 mi / 11.68 km
5.2 mi / 8.32 km
2.3 mi / 3.68 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Integrated
SM antenna
2.3 mi / 3.68 km
1.6 mi / 2.56 km
0.8 mi / 1.28 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that
adds 8 dB to SM
Range
4.1 mi / 6.56 km
2.9 mi / 4.64 km
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
4 mi / 6.4 km
2.8 mi / 4.48 km
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 14
dB to SM Range
4.1 mi / 6.56 km
2.9 mi / 4.64 km
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with Integrated
SM antenna
0.7 mi / 1.12 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that
adds 8 dB to SM
Range
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 14
dB to SM Range
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Integrated
SM antenna
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that
adds 8 dB to SM
Range
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds 14
dB to SM Range
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
Modulation
5.4GHz Max.
LOS Link Budget
(no fade margin)
5.4GHz Max.
nLOS Link
Budget
(additional 5 dB
link loss)
PMP
450 ‡‡‡‡‡
5.4GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget
(additional 15 dB
link loss)
5.4GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget
(additional 25 dB
link loss)
‡‡‡‡‡
Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-77
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 35 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
Modulation
2.4GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no
fade margin)
2.4GHz Max.
nLOS Link
Budget
(additional 5
dB link loss)
PMP 450
2.4GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget
(additional
15 dB link
loss)
2.4GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget
(additional
25 dB link
loss)
1-78
QPSK-SISO
2x
QPSKMIMO-B
4x
16QAMMIMO-B
6x
64QAMMIMO-B
8x
256QAMMIMO-B
with
Integrated
SM antenna
15.2 mi /
24.32 km
10.8 mi /
17.28 km
5.4 mi / 8.64
km
2.4 mi / 3.84
km
1.1 mi / 1.76
km
with
Reflector
Dish that
adds 12 dB
to SM Range
40 mi / 64
km
40 mi / 64
km
21.5 mi /
34.4 km
9.6 mi /
15.36 km
4.3 mi / 6.88
km
with
Integrated
SM antenna
8.6 mi /
13.76 km
6.1 mi / 9.76
km
3 mi / 4.8 km
1.4 mi / 2.24
km
0.6 mi / 0.96
km
with
Reflector
Dish that
adds 12 dB
to SM Range
34.1 mi /
54.56 km
24.1 mi /
38.56 km
12.1 mi /
19.36 km
5.4 mi / 8.64
km
2.4 mi / 3.84
km
with
Integrated
SM antenna
2.7 mi / 4.32
km
1.9 mi / 3.04
km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.4 mi / 0.64
km
0.2 mi / 0.32
km
with
Reflector
Dish that
adds 12 dB
to SM Range
10.8 mi /
17.28 km
7.6 mi /
12.16 km
3.8 mi / 6.08
km
1.7 mi / 2.72
km
0.8 mi / 1.28
km
with
Integrated
SM antenna
0.9 mi / 1.44
km
0.6 mi / 0.96
km
0.3 mi / 0.48
km
0.1 mi / 0.16
km
0.1 mi / 0.16
km
with
Reflector
Dish that
adds 12 dB
to SM Range
3.4 mi / 5.44
km
2.4 mi / 3.84
km
1.2 mi / 1.92
km
0.5 mi / 0.8
km
0.2 mi / 0.32
km
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 36 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
Modulation
2.4GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no
fade margin)
2.4GHz Max.
nLOS Link
Budget
(additional 5
dB link loss)
PMP 450
2.4GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget
(additional 15
dB link loss)
2.4GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget
(additional 25
dB link loss)
QPSK-SISO
2x
QPSKMIMO-B
4x
16QAMMIMO-B
6x
64QAMMIMO-B
8x
256QAMMIMO-B
with
Integrated
SM antenna
24.1 mi /
38.56 km
17.1 mi /
27.36 km
7.3 mi /
11.68 km
3.6 mi / 5.76
km
1 mi / 1.6 km
with
Reflector
Dish that
adds 12 dB to
SM Range
40 mi / 64
km
40 mi / 64
km
29 mi / 46.4
km
14.4 mi /
23.04 km
3.8 mi / 6.08
km
with
Integrated
SM antenna
13.6 mi /
21.76 km
9.6 mi /
15.36 km
4.1 mi / 6.56
km
2 mi / 3.2 km
0.5 mi / 0.8
km
with
Reflector
Dish that
adds 12 dB to
SM Range
40 mi / 64
km
38.2 mi /
61.12 km
16.3 mi /
26.08 km
8.1 mi /
12.96 km
2.2 mi / 3.52
km
with
Integrated
SM antenna
4.3 mi / 6.88
km
3 mi / 4.8 km
1.3 mi / 2.08
km
0.6 mi / 0.96
km
0.2 mi / 0.32
km
with
Reflector
Dish that
adds 12 dB to
SM Range
17.1 mi /
27.36 km
12.1 mi /
19.36 km
5.2 mi / 8.32
km
2.6 mi / 4.16
km
0.7 mi / 1.12
km
with
Integrated
SM antenna
1.4 mi / 2.24
km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.4 mi / 0.64
km
0.2 mi / 0.32
km
0.1 mi / 0.16
km
with
Reflector
Dish that
adds 12 dB to
SM Range
5.4 mi / 8.64
km
3.8 mi / 6.08
km
1.6 mi / 2.56
km
0.8 mi / 1.28
km
0.2 mi / 0.32
km
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-79
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 37 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
Modulation
2.4GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no
fade margin)
2.4GHz Max.
nLOS Link
Budget
(additional 5
dB link loss)
PMP 450
2.4GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget
(additional
15 dB link
loss)
2.4GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget
(additional
25 dB link
loss)
1-80
QPSK-SISO
2x
QPSKMIMO-B
4x
16QAMMIMO-B
6x
64QAMMIMO-B
8x
256QAMMIMO-B
with
Integrated
SM antenna
27.1 mi /
43.36 km
19.2 mi /
30.72 km
10.8 mi /
17.28 km
4.3 mi / 6.88
km
1.4 mi / 2.24
km
with
Reflector
Dish that
adds 12 dB
to SM Range
40 mi / 64
km
40 mi / 64
km
40 mi / 64
km
17.1 mi /
27.36 km
5.4 mi / 8.64
km
with
Integrated
SM antenna
15.2 mi /
24.32 km
10.8 mi /
17.28 km
6.1 mi / 9.76
km
2.4 mi / 3.84
km
0.8 mi / 1.28
km
with
Reflector
Dish that
adds 12 dB
to SM Range
40 mi / 64
km
40 mi / 64
km
24.1 mi /
38.56 km
9.6 mi /
15.36 km
3 mi / 4.8 km
with
Integrated
SM antenna
4.8 mi / 7.68
km
3.4 mi / 5.44
km
1.9 mi / 3.04
km
0.8 mi / 1.28
km
0.2 mi / 0.32
km
with
Reflector
Dish that
adds 12 dB
to SM Range
19.2 mi /
30.72 km
13.6 mi /
21.76 km
7.6 mi /
12.16 km
3 mi / 4.8 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
with
Integrated
SM antenna
1.5 mi / 2.4
km
1.1 mi / 1.76
km
0.6 mi / 0.96
km
0.2 mi / 0.32
km
0.1 mi / 0.16
km
with
Reflector
Dish that
adds 12 dB
to SM Range
6.1 mi / 9.76
km
4.3 mi / 6.88
km
2.4 mi / 3.84
km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.3 mi / 0.48
km
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 38 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
Modulation
3.5GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no
fade margin)
PMP 450
3.5GHz Max.
nLOS Link
Budget
(additional 5
dB link loss)
3.5GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget
(additional 15
dB link loss)
3.5GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget
(additional 25
dB link loss)
QPSK-SISO
2x
QPSKMIMO-B
4x
16QAMMIMO-B
6x
64QAMMIMO-B
8x
256QAMMIMO-B
with
Integrated SM
antenna
11.9 mi /
19.04 km
11.9 mi /
19.04 km
6.1 mi / 9.76
km
2.7 mi / 4.32
km
1.2 mi / 1.92
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
21.5 mi / 34.4
km
9.6 mi / 15.36
km
4.3 mi / 6.88
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
6.7 mi / 10.72
km
6.7 mi / 10.72
km
3.4 mi / 5.44
km
1.5 mi / 2.4
km
0.7 mi / 1.12
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
23.8 mi /
38.08 km
23.8 mi /
38.08 km
12.1 mi /
19.36 km
5.4 mi / 8.64
km
2.4 mi / 3.84
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
2.1 mi / 3.36
km
2.1 mi / 3.36
km
1.1 mi / 1.76
km
0.5 mi / 0.8
km
0.2 mi / 0.32
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
7.5 mi / 12
km
7.5 mi / 12
km
3.8 mi / 6.08
km
1.7 mi / 2.72
km
0.8 mi / 1.28
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
0.7 mi / 1.12
km
0.7 mi / 1.12
km
0.3 mi / 0.48
km
0.2 mi / 0.32
km
0.1 mi / 0.16
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
2.4 mi / 3.84
km
2.4 mi / 3.84
km
1.2 mi / 1.92
km
0.5 mi / 0.8
km
0.2 mi / 0.32
km
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-81
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 39 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
Modulation
3.5GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no
fade margin)
PMP 450
3.5GHz Max.
nLOS Link
Budget
(additional 5
dB link loss)
3.5GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget
(additional 15
dB link loss)
3.5GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget
(additional 25
dB link loss)
1-82
QPSK-SISO
2x
QPSKMIMO-B
4x
16QAMMIMO-B
6x
64QAMMIMO-B
8x
256QAMMIMO-B
with
Integrated SM
antenna
17.2 mi /
27.52 km
17.2 mi /
27.52 km
6.9 mi / 11.04
km
3.5 mi / 5.6
km
1.7 mi / 2.72
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
24.6 mi /
39.36 km
12.5 mi / 20
km
6.2 mi / 9.92
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
9.7 mi / 15.52
km
9.7 mi / 15.52
km
3.9 mi / 6.24
km
2 mi / 3.2 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
34.3 mi /
54.88 km
34.3 mi /
54.88 km
13.8 mi /
22.08 km
7 mi / 11.2 km
3.5 mi / 5.6
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
3.1 mi / 4.96
km
3.1 mi / 4.96
km
1.2 mi / 1.92
km
0.6 mi / 0.96
km
0.3 mi / 0.48
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
10.8 mi /
17.28 km
10.8 mi /
17.28 km
4.4 mi / 7.04
km
2.2 mi / 3.52
km
1.1 mi / 1.76
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
1 mi / 1.6 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.4 mi / 0.64
km
0.2 mi / 0.32
km
0.1 mi / 0.16
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
3.4 mi / 5.44
km
3.4 mi / 5.44
km
1.4 mi / 2.24
km
0.7 mi / 1.12
km
0.3 mi / 0.48
km
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 40 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
Modulation
3.5GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no
fade margin)
PMP 450
3.5GHz Max.
nLOS Link
Budget
(additional 5
dB link loss)
3.5GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget
(additional 15
dB link loss)
3.5GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget
(additional 25
dB link loss)
QPSK-SISO
2x
QPSKMIMO-B
4x
16QAMMIMO-B
6x
64QAMMIMO-B
8x
256QAMMIMO-B
with
Integrated SM
antenna
20.9 mi /
33.44 km
20.9 mi /
33.44 km
10.7 mi /
17.12 km
4.8 mi / 7.68
km
1.9 mi / 3.04
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
38 mi / 60.8
km
17 mi / 27.2
km
6.6 mi / 10.56
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
11.7 mi /
18.72 km
11.7 mi /
18.72 km
6 mi / 9.6 km
2.7 mi / 4.32
km
1 mi / 1.6 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
21.4 mi /
34.24 km
9.5 mi / 15.2
km
3.7 mi / 5.92
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
3.7 mi / 5.92
km
3.7 mi / 5.92
km
1.9 mi / 3.04
km
0.9 mi / 1.44
km
0.3 mi / 0.48
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
13.2 mi /
21.12 km
13.2 mi /
21.12 km
6.8 mi / 10.88
km
3 mi / 4.8 km
1.2 mi / 1.92
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
1.2 mi / 1.92
km
1.2 mi / 1.92
km
0.6 mi / 0.96
km
0.3 mi / 0.48
km
0.1 mi / 0.16
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
4.2 mi / 6.72
km
4.2 mi / 6.72
km
2.1 mi / 3.36
km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.4 mi / 0.64
km
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-83
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 41 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
Modulation
3.6GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no
fade margin)
PMP 450
3.6GHz Max.
nLOS Link
Budget
(additional 5
dB link loss)
3.6GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget
(additional 15
dB link loss)
3.6GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget
(additional 25
dB link loss)
1-84
QPSK-SISO
2x
QPSKMIMO-B
4x
16QAMMIMO-B
6x
64QAMMIMO-B
8x
256QAMMIMO-B
with
Integrated SM
antenna
11.9 mi /
19.04 km
11.9 mi /
19.04 km
6.1 mi / 9.76
km
2.7 mi / 4.32
km
1.2 mi / 1.92
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
21.5 mi / 34.4
km
9.6 mi / 15.36
km
4.3 mi / 6.88
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
6.7 mi / 10.72
km
6.7 mi / 10.72
km
3.4 mi / 5.44
km
1.5 mi / 2.4
km
0.7 mi / 1.12
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
23.8 mi /
38.08 km
23.8 mi /
38.08 km
12.1 mi /
19.36 km
5.4 mi / 8.64
km
2.4 mi / 3.84
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
2.1 mi / 3.36
km
2.1 mi / 3.36
km
1.1 mi / 1.76
km
0.5 mi / 0.8
km
0.2 mi / 0.32
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
7.5 mi / 12
km
7.5 mi / 12
km
3.8 mi / 6.08
km
1.7 mi / 2.72
km
0.8 mi / 1.28
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
0.7 mi / 1.12
km
0.7 mi / 1.12
km
0.3 mi / 0.48
km
0.2 mi / 0.32
km
0.1 mi / 0.16
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
2.4 mi / 3.84
km
2.4 mi / 3.84
km
1.2 mi / 1.92
km
0.5 mi / 0.8
km
0.2 mi / 0.32
km
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 42 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
Modulation
3.6GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no
fade margin)
PMP 450
3.6GHz Max.
nLOS Link
Budget
(additional 5
dB link loss)
3.6GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget
(additional 15
dB link loss)
3.6GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget
(additional 25
dB link loss)
QPSK-SISO
2x
QPSKMIMO-B
4x
16QAMMIMO-B
6x
64QAMMIMO-B
8x
256QAMMIMO-B
with
Integrated SM
antenna
17.2 mi /
27.52 km
17.2 mi /
27.52 km
6.9 mi / 11.04
km
3.5 mi / 5.6
km
1.7 mi / 2.72
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
24.6 mi /
39.36 km
12.5 mi / 20
km
6.2 mi / 9.92
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
9.7 mi / 15.52
km
9.7 mi / 15.52
km
3.9 mi / 6.24
km
2 mi / 3.2 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
34.3 mi /
54.88 km
34.3 mi /
54.88 km
13.8 mi /
22.08 km
7 mi / 11.2 km
3.5 mi / 5.6
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
3.1 mi / 4.96
km
3.1 mi / 4.96
km
1.2 mi / 1.92
km
0.6 mi / 0.96
km
0.3 mi / 0.48
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
10.8 mi /
17.28 km
10.8 mi /
17.28 km
4.4 mi / 7.04
km
2.2 mi / 3.52
km
1.1 mi / 1.76
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
1 mi / 1.6 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.4 mi / 0.64
km
0.2 mi / 0.32
km
0.1 mi / 0.16
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
3.4 mi / 5.44
km
3.4 mi / 5.44
km
1.4 mi / 2.24
km
0.7 mi / 1.12
km
0.3 mi / 0.48
km
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-85
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 43 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
Modulation
3.6GHz Max.
LOS Link
Budget (no
fade margin)
PMP 450
3.6GHz Max.
nLOS Link
Budget
(additional 5
dB link loss)
3.6GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget
(additional 15
dB link loss)
3.6GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget
(additional 25
dB link loss)
1-86
QPSK-SISO
2x
QPSKMIMO-B
4x
16QAMMIMO-B
6x
64QAMMIMO-B
8x
256QAMMIMO-B
with
Integrated SM
antenna
20.9 mi /
33.44 km
20.9 mi /
33.44 km
10.7 mi /
17.12 km
4.8 mi / 7.68
km
1.9 mi / 3.04
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
38 mi / 60.8
km
17 mi / 27.2
km
6.6 mi / 10.56
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
11.7 mi /
18.72 km
11.7 mi /
18.72 km
6 mi / 9.6 km
2.7 mi / 4.32
km
1 mi / 1.6 km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
21.4 mi /
34.24 km
9.5 mi / 15.2
km
3.7 mi / 5.92
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
3.7 mi / 5.92
km
3.7 mi / 5.92
km
1.9 mi / 3.04
km
0.9 mi / 1.44
km
0.3 mi / 0.48
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
13.2 mi /
21.12 km
13.2 mi /
21.12 km
6.8 mi / 10.88
km
3 mi / 4.8 km
1.2 mi / 1.92
km
with
Integrated SM
antenna
1.2 mi / 1.92
km
1.2 mi / 1.92
km
0.6 mi / 0.96
km
0.3 mi / 0.48
km
0.1 mi / 0.16
km
with Reflector
Dish that adds
11 dB to SM
Range
4.2 mi / 6.72
km
4.2 mi / 6.72
km
2.1 mi / 3.36
km
1 mi / 1.6 km
0.4 mi / 0.64
km
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 44 Link budget details – 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 20MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
QPSK-SISO
2x
16-QAM-SISO
3x
64-QAM-SISO
with Integrated SM
antenna
9.9 mi / 15.84 km
4.4 mi / 7.04 km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
with CLIP that
adds 9 dB to SM
Range
24.8 mi / 39.68 km
11.1 mi / 17.76 km
4.2 mi / 6.72 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
19.7 mi / 31.52 km
8.8 mi / 14.08 km
3.3 mi / 5.28 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
40 mi / 64 km
24.8 mi / 39.68 km
9.3 mi / 14.88 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
5.5 mi / 8.8 km
2.5 mi / 4 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
with CLIP that
adds 9 dB to SM
Range
13.9 mi / 22.24 km
6.2 mi / 9.92 km
2.3 mi / 3.68 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
11.1 mi / 17.76 km
4.9 mi / 7.84 km
1.9 mi / 3.04 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
31.2 mi / 49.92 km
13.9 mi / 22.24 km
5.2 mi / 8.32 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
1.8 mi / 2.88 km
0.8 mi / 1.28 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with CLIP that
adds 9 dB to SM
Range
4.4 mi / 7.04 km
2 mi / 3.2 km
0.7 mi / 1.12 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
3.5 mi / 5.6 km
1.6 mi / 2.56 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
9.9 mi / 15.84 km
4.4 mi / 7.04 km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that
adds 9 dB to SM
Range
1.4 mi / 2.24 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
3.1 mi / 4.96 km
1.4 mi / 2.24 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
Modulation
5.8GHz Max. LOS
Link Budget (no
fade margin)
5.8GHz Max.
nLOS Link Budget
(additional 5 dB
link loss)
PMP 450 AP
PMP 430 SM
5.8GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget (additional
15 dB link loss)
5.8GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget (additional
25 dB link loss)
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-87
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 45 Link budget details – 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 10MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
2x
3x
QPSK-SISO
16-QAM-SISO
64-QAM-SISO
with Integrated SM
antenna
12.4 mi / 19.84 km
6.2 mi / 9.92 km
2.4 mi / 3.84 km
with CLIP that
adds 9 dB to SM
Range
31.2 mi / 49.92 km
15.6 mi / 24.96 km
6 mi / 9.6 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
24.8 mi / 39.68 km
12.4 mi / 19.84 km
4.8 mi / 7.68 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
40 mi / 64 km
35 mi / 56 km
13.5 mi / 21.6 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
7 mi / 11.2 km
3.5 mi / 5.6 km
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
with CLIP that
adds 9 dB to SM
Range
17.5 mi / 28 km
8.8 mi / 14.08 km
3.4 mi / 5.44 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
13.9 mi / 22.24 km
7 mi / 11.2 km
2.7 mi / 4.32 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
39.3 mi / 62.88 km
19.7 mi / 31.52 km
7.6 mi / 12.16 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
2.2 mi / 3.52 km
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
with CLIP that
adds 9 dB to SM
Range
5.5 mi / 8.8 km
2.8 mi / 4.48 km
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
4.4 mi / 7.04 km
2.2 mi / 3.52 km
0.8 mi / 1.28 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
12.4 mi / 19.84 km
6.2 mi / 9.92 km
2.4 mi / 3.84 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
0.7 mi / 1.12 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that
adds 9 dB to SM
Range
1.8 mi / 2.88 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
1.4 mi / 2.24 km
0.7 mi / 1.12 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
3.9 mi / 6.24 km
2 mi / 3.2 km
0.8 mi / 1.28 km
Modulation
5.8GHz Max. LOS
Link Budget (no
fade margin)
5.8GHz Max.
nLOS Link Budget
(additional 5 dB
link loss)
PMP 450 AP
PMP 430 SM
5.8GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget (additional
15 dB link loss)
5.8GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget (additional
25 dB link loss)
1-88
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 46 Link budget details – 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 5MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
QPSK-SISO
2x
16-QAM-SISO
3x
64-QAM-SISO
with Integrated SM
antenna
19.1 mi / 30.56 km
7.6 mi / 12.16 km
3 mi / 4.8 km
with CLIP that adds
9 dB to SM Range
40 mi / 64 km
19.1 mi / 30.56 km
7.6 mi / 12.16 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
38.2 mi / 61.12 km
15.2 mi / 24.32 km
6 mi / 9.6 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
40 mi / 64 km
40 mi / 64 km
17 mi / 27.2 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
10.8 mi / 17.28 km
4.3 mi / 6.88 km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
with CLIP that adds
9 dB to SM Range
27 mi / 43.2 km
10.8 mi / 17.28 km
4.3 mi / 6.88 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
21.5 mi / 34.4 km
8.5 mi / 13.6 km
3.4 mi / 5.44 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
40 mi / 64 km
24.1 mi / 38.56 km
9.6 mi / 15.36 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
3.4 mi / 5.44 km
1.4 mi / 2.24 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
with CLIP that adds
9 dB to SM Range
8.5 mi / 13.6 km
3.4 mi / 5.44 km
1.4 mi / 2.24 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
6.8 mi / 10.88 km
2.7 mi / 4.32 km
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
19.1 mi / 30.56 km
7.6 mi / 12.16 km
3 mi / 4.8 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with CLIP that adds
9 dB to SM Range
2.7 mi / 4.32 km
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
2.1 mi / 3.36 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
6 mi / 9.6 km
2.4 mi / 3.84 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
Modulation
5.8GHz Max. LOS
Link Budget (no
fade margin)
5.8GHz Max.
nLOS Link Budget
(additional 5 dB
link loss)
PMP 450 AP
PMP 430 SM
5.8GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget (additional
15 dB link loss)
5.8GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget (additional
25 dB link loss)
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-89
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 47 Link budget details – 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 20MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
QPSK-SISO
2x
16-QAM-SISO
3x
64-QAM-SISO
with Integrated SM
antenna
6.3 mi / 10.08 km
2.9 mi / 4.64 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
with CLIP that adds
8 dB to SM Range
7.5 mi / 12 km
3.8 mi / 6.08 km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
7.5 mi / 12 km
3.8 mi / 6.08 km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
7.5 mi / 12 km
3.8 mi / 6.08 km
1.7 mi / 2.72 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
3.5 mi / 5.6 km
1.6 mi / 2.56 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
with CLIP that adds
8 dB to SM Range
4.2 mi / 6.72 km
2.1 mi / 3.36 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
4.2 mi / 6.72 km
2.1 mi / 3.36 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
4.2 mi / 6.72 km
2.1 mi / 3.36 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
1.1 mi / 1.76 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with CLIP that adds
8 dB to SM Range
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.7 mi / 1.12 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.7 mi / 1.12 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.7 mi / 1.12 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that adds
8 dB to SM Range
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
Modulation
5.4GHz Max. LOS
Link Budget (no
fade margin)
5.4GHz Max.
nLOS Link Budget
(additional 5 dB
link loss)
PMP 450 AP §§§§§
PMP 430 SM
5.4GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget (additional
15 dB link loss)
5.4GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget (additional
25 dB link loss)
§§§§§
Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements.
1-90
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 48 Link budget details – 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 10MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
QPSK-SISO
2x
16-QAM-SISO
3x
64-QAM-SISO
with Integrated SM
antenna
5.3 mi / 8.48 km
2.7 mi / 4.32 km
1 mi / 1.6 km
with CLIP that adds
8 dB to SM Range
7.5 mi / 12 km
3.4 mi / 5.44 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
7.5 mi / 12 km
3.4 mi / 5.44 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
7.5 mi / 12 km
3.4 mi / 5.44 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
3 mi / 4.8 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
with CLIP that adds
8 dB to SM Range
4.2 mi / 6.72 km
1.9 mi / 3.04 km
0.8 mi / 1.28 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
4.2 mi / 6.72 km
1.9 mi / 3.04 km
0.8 mi / 1.28 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
4.2 mi / 6.72 km
1.9 mi / 3.04 km
0.8 mi / 1.28 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with CLIP that adds
8 dB to SM Range
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that adds
8 dB to SM Range
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with LENS that
adds 5 dB to SM
Range
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
Modulation
5.4GHz Max. LOS
Link Budget (no
fade margin)
5.4GHz Max. nLOS
Link Budget
(additional 5 dB
link loss)
******
PMP 450 AP
PMP 430 SM
5.4GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget (additional
15 dB link loss)
5.4GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget (additional
25 dB link loss)
******
Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-91
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 49 Link budget details – 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 5MHz Channel Bandwidth
Product
Range Details
Parameter
1x
QPSK-SISO
2x
16-QAM-SISO
3x
64-QAM-SISO
with Integrated SM
antenna
6.7 mi / 10.72 km
2.9 mi / 4.64 km
0.9 mi / 1.44 km
with CLIP that adds
8 dB to SM Range
7.5 mi / 12 km
3.4 mi / 5.44 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
with LENS that
adds 5.5 dB to SM
Range
7.5 mi / 12 km
3.4 mi / 5.44 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
7.5 mi / 12 km
3.4 mi / 5.44 km
1.5 mi / 2.4 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
3.8 mi / 6.08 km
1.6 mi / 2.56 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
with CLIP that adds
8 dB to SM Range
4.2 mi / 6.72 km
1.9 mi / 3.04 km
0.8 mi / 1.28 km
with LENS that
adds 5.5 dB to SM
Range
4.2 mi / 6.72 km
1.9 mi / 3.04 km
0.8 mi / 1.28 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
4.2 mi / 6.72 km
1.9 mi / 3.04 km
0.8 mi / 1.28 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
1.2 mi / 1.92 km
0.5 mi / 0.8 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
with CLIP that adds
8 dB to SM Range
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with LENS that
adds 5.5 dB to SM
Range
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
SM Range
1.3 mi / 2.08 km
0.6 mi / 0.96 km
0.3 mi / 0.48 km
with Integrated SM
antenna
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with CLIP that adds
8 dB to SM Range
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with LENS that
adds 5.5 dB to SM
Range
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
with Reflector Dish
that adds 14 dB to
0.4 mi / 0.64 km
0.2 mi / 0.32 km
0.1 mi / 0.16 km
Modulation
5.4GHz Max. LOS
Link Budget (no
fade margin)
5.4GHz Max.
nLOS Link Budget
(additional 5 dB
link loss)
PMP 450 AP ††††††
PMP 430 SM
5.4GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link
Budget (additional
15 dB link loss)
5.4GHz Max.
NLOS2 Link
Budget (additional
25 dB link loss)
††††††
1-92
Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
SM Range
Path loss considerations
Path loss is the amount of attenuation the radio signal undergoes between the two ends of the link.
Calculating path loss
The path loss is the sum of the attenuation of the path if there were no obstacles in the way (Free Space Path
Loss), the attenuation caused by obstacles (Excess Path Loss) and a margin to allow for possible fading of the
radio signal (Fade Margin). The following calculation needs to be performed to judge whether a particular link
can be installed:
L free _ space + Lexcess + L fade + Lseasonal < Lcapability
Where:
Is:
L free _ space
Free Space Path Loss (dB)
Lexcess
Excess Path Loss (dB)
L fade
Fade Margin Required (dB)
Lseasonal
Seasonal Fading (dB)
Lcapability
Equipment Capability (dB)
Calculating maximum power level for connectorized AP units
If a connectorized PMP 450 AP is to be installed in a country that imposes an EIRP limit in the selected band,
calculate the highest setting of Maximum Power Level that will be permitted using this formula:
Maximum Power Level (dBm) = Allowed EIRP (dBm) – Antenna Gain (dBi) + Cable Loss (dB)
Where:
Is:
Maximum Power
Level (dBm)
the highest permissible setting of the transmitter
output power,
Allowed EIRP (dBm)
the EIRP limit allowed by the regulations,
Antenna Gain (dBi)
the gain of the chosen antenna,
Cable Loss (dB)
the loss of the RF cable connecting the AP to the
antenna.
For more information on EIRP limits, see Compliance with radio regulations on page 3-16.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-93
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Understanding Attenuation
An RF signal in space is attenuated by atmospheric and other effects as a function of the distance from the
initial transmission point. The further a reception point is placed from the transmission point, the weaker is the
received RF signal.
Calculating Link Loss
The link loss is the total attenuation of the wireless signal between two point-to-multipoint units. The link loss
calculation is presented below:
Link Loss (dB) = Transmit power of the remote wireless unit (dBm) − Tx Cable loss (dB) − Received
power at the local unit (dBm) – Rx cable loss (dB) + Antenna gain at the remote unit (dBi) + Antenna
gain at the local unit (dBi)
Calculating Rx Signal Level
The Rx sensitivity of each module is provided at http://www.cambiumnetworks.com. The determinants in Rx
signal level are illustrated in Figure 17.
Figure 17 Determinants in Rx signal level
Rx signal level is calculated as follows:
Rx signal level dB = Tx power − Tx cable loss + Tx antenna gain
− free space path loss + Rx antenna gain − Rx cable loss
This Rx signal level calculation presumes that a clear line of sight is established between the transmitter and
receiver and that no objects encroach in the Fresnel zone.
1-94
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Calculating Fade Margin
Free space path loss is a major determinant in Rx (received) signal level. Rx signal level, in turn, is a major
factor in the system operating margin (fade margin), which is calculated as follows:
system operating margin (fade margin) dB =Rx signal level dB − Rx sensitivity dB
Thus, fade margin is the difference between strength of the received signal and the strength that the receiver
requires for maintaining a reliable link. A higher fade margin is characteristic of a more reliable link.
Analyzing the RF Environment
An essential element in RF network planning is the analysis of spectrum usage and the strength of the signals
that occupy the spectrum you are planning to use. Regardless of how you measure and log or chart the results
you find (through the Spectrum Analyzer in SM feature or by using a spectrum analyzer), you should do so:
•
at various times of day.
•
on various days of the week.
•
periodically into the future.
As new RF neighbors move in or consumer devices in your spectrum proliferate, this will keep you aware of the
dynamic possibilities for interference with your network.
Mapping RF Neighbor Frequencies
These modules allow you to
•
use an SM or an AP that is temporarily transformed into an SM, as a spectrum analyzer.
•
view a graphical display that shows power level in RSSI and dBm at 5-MHz increments throughout the
frequency band range, regardless of limited selections in the Custom Radio Frequency Scan Selection List
parameter of the SM.
•
select an AP channel that minimizes interference from other RF equipment.
The following procedure causes the SM to drop any active RF link. If a link is dropped when the spectrum analysis begins,
the link can be re-established when either a 15-minute interval has elapsed or the spectrum analyzer feature is disabled.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-95
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Analyzing the spectrum
To use the built-in spectrum analyzer functionality of the SM (or AP that is temporarily configured as an SM
for spectrum analysis via the AP’s GUI) proceed as follows:
Procedure 3 Analyzing the spectrum
Predetermine a power source and interface that will work for the SM in the area you want to
analyze.
Take the SM, power source, and interface device to the area.
Access the Tools web page of the SM.
Click Start Timed Spectrum Analysis
After 10 seconds, the results are displayed:
Travel to another location in the area.
Click Start Timed Spectrum Analysis
Repeat Steps 6 and 7 until the area has been adequately scanned and logged.
As with any other data that pertains to your business, a decision today to put the data into a retrievable
database may grow in value to you over time. The Spectrum Analyzer contains configurable parameters to fit
your business requirements. See the PMP 450 Operations Guide for further information.
Wherever you find the measured noise level is greater than the sensitivity of the radio that you plan to
deploy, use the noise level (rather than the link budget) for your link feasibility calculations.
1-96
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Anticipating Reflection of Radio Waves
In the signal path, any object that is larger than the wavelength of the signal can reflect the signal. Such an
object can even be the surface of the earth or of a river, bay, or lake. The wavelength of the signal is
approximately
•
2 inches for 2.4, 3.5GHz, 3.6 GHz, 5.4-GHz and 5.8-GHz signals.
A reflected signal can arrive at the antenna of the receiver later than the non-reflected signal arrives. These two
or more signals cause the condition known as multipath. Multipath may increase or decrease the signal level
and so overall attenuation may be higher or lower than that caused by the link distance. This is problematic at
the margin of the link budget, where the standard operating margin (fade margin) may be compromised.
Noting Possible Obstructions in the Fresnel Zone
The Fresnel (pronounced fre∙NEL) Zone is a three-dimensional volume around the line of sight of an antenna
transmission. Objects that penetrate this area can cause the received strength of the transmitted signal to fade.
Out-of-phase reflections and absorption of the signal result in signal cancellation.
The foliage of trees and plants in the Fresnel Zone can cause signal loss. Seasonal density, moisture content of
the foliage, and other factors such as wind may change the amount of loss. Plan to perform frequent and
regular link tests if you must transmit though foliage.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-97
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Multiple OFDM Access Point Clusters
When deploying multiple AP clusters in a dense area, consider aligning the clusters as shown below. However,
this is only a recommendation. An installation may dictate a different pattern of channel assignments.
Figure 18 Example layout of 16 Access Point sectors (ABCD), 90 degree sectors
An example for assignment of frequency channels is provided in the following table.
See section Network migration planning on page 1-58 for more information on migrating to a PMP 450
network.
Table 50 Example 5.8-GHz OFDM channel assignment by sector
1-98
Symbol
Frequency
5.740 GHz
5.760 GHz
5.780 GHz
5.800 GHz
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Figure 19 Example layout of 16 Access Point sectors (ABC), 60 degree sectors
An example for assignment of frequency channels and sector IDs is provided in the following table.
See section Network migration planning on page 1-58 for more information on migrating to a PMP 450
network.
Table 51 Example 5.8-GHz OFDM channel assignment by sector
Symbol
Frequency
5.740 GHz
5.760 GHz
5.780 GHz
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-99
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Planning for co-location and using the OFDM Frame Calculator
Tool
The first step to avoid interference in wireless systems is to set all APs to receive timing from a synchronization
source (Cluster Management Module, or Universal Global Positioning System). This ensures that the modules
are in sync and start transmitting at the same time each frame.
The second step to avoid interference is to configure parameters on all APs of the same frequency band in
proximity such that they have compatible transmit/receive ratios (all stop transmitting each frame before any
start receiving). This avoids the problem of one AP attempting to receive the signal from a distant SM while a
nearby AP transmits, which could overpower that signal.
The following parameters on the AP determine the transmit/receive ratio:
•
Max Range
•
Downlink Data percentage
•
(reserved) Control Slots
If OFDM (PMP 430, PMP 450, PTP 230) and FSK (PMP 1x0) APs of the same frequency band are in
proximity, or if you want APs set to different parameters (differing in their Max Range values, for example),
then you should use the Frame Calculator to identify compatible settings.
The frame calculator is available on the Frame Calculator tab of the Tools web page. To use the Frame
Calculator, type into the calculator various configurable parameter values for each proximal AP, and then
record the resulting AP Receive Start value. Next vary the Downlink Data percentage in each calculation and
iterate until the calculated AP Receive Start for all collocated APs are within 300 bit times; if possible, within
150 bit times. In Cambium Point-to-Multipoint systems, 10 bit times = 1 µs.
The calculator does not use values in the module or populate its parameters. It is merely a convenience
application that runs on a module. For this reason, you can use any FSK module (AP, SM, BHM, BHS) to
perform FSK frame calculations for setting the parameters on an FSK AP and any OFDM module (AP, SM,
BHM, BHS) to perform OFDM frame calculations for setting the parameters on an OFDM AP.
IMPORTANT!
APs that have slightly mismatched transmit-to-receive ratios and low levels of data traffic may
see little effect on throughput. A system that was not tuned for co-location may work fine at
low traffic levels, but encounter problems at higher traffic levels. The conservative practice is
to tune for co-location before traffic ultimately increases. This prevents problems that occur as
sectors are built.
1-100
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Figure 20 OFDM Frame Calculator tab
In the Frame Calculator tab, you can set the following parameters.
Table 52 OFDM Frame Calculator tab attributes
Attribute
Meaning
Link Mode
For AP to SM frame calculations, select Multipoint Link
Platform Type AP/BHM
Use the drop-down list to select the hardware series (board type) of the
AP.
Platform Type SM/BHS
Use the drop-down list to select the hardware series (board type) of the
SM.
Channel Bandwidth
Set this to the channel bandwidth used in the AP.
Cyclic Prefix
Set this to the cyclic prefix used in the AP.
Max Range
Set to the same value as the Max Range parameter is set in the AP(s).
Air Delay
This field should be left at the default of 0 ns.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-101
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Attribute
Meaning
Downlink Data
Initially set this parameter to the same value that the AP has for its
Downlink Data parameter (percentage). Then, as you use the Frame
Calculator tool in Procedure 4, you will vary the value in this
parameter to find the proper value to write into the Downlink Data
parameter of all APs in the cluster.
PMP 450 Series APs offer a range of 15% to 85%, and default to 75%.
The value that you set in this parameter has the following interaction
with the value of the Max Range parameter (above):
The default Max Range value is 5 miles and, at that distance, the
maximum Downlink Data value (85% in PMP450) is functional.
Control Slots
Set this parameter to the value of the Control Slot parameter is set in
the APs.
The Calculated Frame Results display several items of interest:
Table 53 OFDM Calculated Frame Results attributes
1-102
Attribute
Meaning
Modulation
The type of radio modulation used in the calculation (OFDM for PMP
450)
Total Frame Bits
The total number of bits used in the calculated frames
Data Slots (Down/Up)
This field is based on the Downlink Data setting. For example, a result
within the typical range for a Downlink Data setting of 75% is 61/21,
meaning 61 data slots down and 21 data slots up.
Round Trip Air Delay
(MaxRange)
This is the roundtrip air delay in bit times for the Max Range value set
in the calculator
Approximate distance
(MaxRange)
The Max Range value used for frame calculation
AP Transmit End
In bit times, this is the frame position at which the AP ceases
transmission.
AP Receive Start
In bit times, this is the frame position at which the AP is ready to
receive transmission from the SM.
AP Receive End
In bit times, this is the frame position at which the AP will cease
receiving transmission from the SM.
SM Receive End
In bit times, this is the frame position at which the SM will cease
receiving transmission from the AP.
SM Transmit Start
In bit times, this is the frame position at which the SM will begin
transmission.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
To use the Frame Calculator to ensure that all APs are configured to transmit and receive at the same time,
follow the procedure below:
Procedure 4 Using the Frame Calculator
Populate the OFDM Frame Calculator parameters with appropriate values as
described above.
Click the Calculate button.
Scroll down the tab to the Calculated Frame Results section
Record the value of the AP Receive Start field
Enter a parameter set from another AP in the system – for example, an AP in the
same cluster that has a higher Max Range value configured.
Click the Calculate button.
Scroll down the tab to the Calculated Frame Results section
If the recorded values of the AP Receive Start fields are within 150 bit times of each
other, skip to step 10.
If the recorded values of the AP Receive Start fields are not within 150 bit times of
each other, modify the Downlink Data parameter until the calculated results for AP
Receive Start are within 300 bit time of each other, if possible, 150 bit time.
10
Access the Radio tab in the Configuration web page of each AP in the cluster and
change its Downlink Data parameter (percentage) to the last value that was used in
the Frame Calculator.
Selecting Sites for Network Elements
The APs must be positioned
•
with hardware that the wind and ambient vibrations cannot flex or move.
•
where a tower or rooftop is available or can be erected.
•
where a grounding system is available.
•
with lightning arrestors to transport lightning strikes away from equipment.
•
at a proper height:
o higher than the tallest points of objects immediately around them (such as trees, buildings, and tower
legs).
•
away from high-RF energy sites (such as AM or FM stations, high-powered antennas, and live AM radio
towers).
•
in line-of-sight paths
o to the SMs.
at least 2 feet (0.6 meters) below the tallest point on the tower, pole, or roof (for lightning protection).
that will not be obstructed by trees as they grow or structures that are later built.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-103
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Visual line of sight does not guarantee radio line of sight.
Surveying Sites
Factors to survey at potential sites include
•
what pre-existing wireless equipment exists at the site. (Perform spectrum analysis.)
•
whether available mounting positions exist near the lowest elevation that satisfies line of site, coverage,
and other link criteria.
•
whether you will always have the right to decide who climbs the tower to install and maintain your
equipment, and whether that person or company can climb at any hour of any day.
•
whether you will have collaborative rights and veto power to prevent interference to your equipment from
wireless equipment that is installed at the site in the future.
•
whether a pre-existing grounding system (path to Protective Earth ) exists, and what is required to
establish a path to it.
•
who is permitted to run any indoor lengths of cable.
Clearing the Radio Horizon
Because the surface of the earth is curved, higher module elevations are required for greater link distances. This
effect can be critical to link connectivity in link spans that are greater than 8 miles (12 km).
To use metric units to find the minimum height required to reach the radio horizon use the following equation:
Radio horizon distance (km) = 4.12 (SQRT(h1) + SQRT(h2))
Where:
Is:
h1
height of the AP
h2
height of the SM
To use English standard units to find the angle of elevation, use the following formula:
Radio horizon distance (km) = 1.42 (SQRT(h1) + SQRT(h2))
Where:
1-104
Is:
h1
height of the AP
h2
height of the SM
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Calculating the Aim Angles
The proper angle of tilt can be calculated as a factor of both the difference in elevation and the distance that
the link spans. Even in this case, a plumb line and a protractor can be helpful to ensure the proper tilt. This tilt
is typically minimal.
The number of degrees to offset (from vertical) the mounting hardware leg of the support tube is equal to the
angle of elevation from the lower module to the higher module ( VLAN web page of the
AP. The Q-in-Q EtherType parameter is configured with a default EtherType of 0x88a8 in addition to four
alternate EtherTypes that can be configured to aid in interoperability with existing networks that use a
different EtherType than the default.
The C-VLAN is the inner VLAN tag, which is the same as 802.1Q. As a top level concept, this operates on the
outermost tag at any given time, either “pushing” a tag on or “popping” a tag off. This means packets will at
most transition from an 802.1Q frame to an 801.ad frame (with a tag “pushed” on) or an untagged 802.1 frame
(with the tag “popped” off. Similarly, for an 802.1ad frame, this can only transition from an 802.1ad frame to
an 802.1Q frame (with the tag “popped” off) since the radio software only supports 2 levels of tags.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-127
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Security planning
This section describes how to plan for PMP 450 networks to operate in secure mode.
Isolating APs from the Internet
Ensure that the IP addresses of the APs in your network
•
are not routable over the Internet.
•
do not share the subnet of the IP address of your user.
RFC 1918, Address Allocation for Private Subnets, reserves for private IP networks three blocks of IP
addresses that are not routable over the Internet:
•
/8 subnets have one reserved network, 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255.
•
/16 subnets have 16 reserved networks, 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255.
•
/24 subnets have 256 reserved networks, 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255.
Managing module access by passwords
Adding a user for access to a module
From the factory, each module has a preconfigured administrator-level account in the name root, which
initially requires no associated password. This is the same root account that you may have used for access to
the module by ftp. When you upgrade a module
•
an account is created in the name admin.
•
both admin and root inherit the password that was previously used for access to the module:
o the Full Access password, if one was set.
the Display-Only Access password, if one was set and no Full Access password was set.
If you use Wireless Manager, do not delete the root account from any module. If you use an NMS that
communicates with modules through SNMP, do not delete the root account from any module unless you first
can confirm that the NMS does not rely on the root account for access to the modules.
Each module supports four or fewer user accounts, regardless of account levels. The available levels are
1-128
•
ADMINISTRATOR, who has full read and write permissions. This is the level of the root and admin
users, as well as any other administrator accounts that one of them creates.
•
INSTALLER, who has permissions identical to those of ADMINISTRATOR except that the installer
cannot add or delete users or change the password of any other user.
•
TECHNICIAN, who
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
•
GUEST, who has no write permissions and only a limited view of General Status tab
From the factory default state, configure passwords for both the root and admin account at the
ADMINISTRATOR permission level, using the Account => Change Users Password tab. (If you configure
only one of these, then the other will still require no password for access into it and thus remain a security risk.)
If you are intent on configuring only one of them, delete the admin account. The root account is the only
account that CNUT uses to update the module.
After a password has been set for any ADMINISTRATOR-level account, initial access to the module GUI
opens the view of GUEST level.
Table 57 Identity-based user account permissions - AP
Menu
Option
Menu Tab
ADMIN
INSTALLER
TECH
Home
General Status
Session Status
Remote Subscribers
Event Log
Network Interface
Layer2 Neighbors
Configuration General
IP
Radio
SNMP
Quality of Service (QoS)
Security
Time
VLAN
VLAN Membership
DiffServ
Protocol Filtering
Port Configuration
Syslog
Unit Settings
Statistics
Scheduler
SM Registration Failures
Bridge Control Block
Bridging Table
Ethernet
Radio
VLAN
Data VC
Throughput
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-129
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Tools
Accounts
Quick Start
Copyright
Logoff
1-130
Filter
ARP
Overload
DHCP Relay
Pass Through Statistics
DNS Statistics
Link Capacity Test
OFDM Frame Calculator
Subscriber Configuration
Link Status
Remote Spectrum Analyzer
Sessions
DNS Test
AP Sessions
AP Authentication State Machine
Log
AP Authorization State Machine Log
EAP Radius Log
User Authentication And Access
Tracking
Change User Password
Add User
Delete User
Quick Start
Region Settings
Radio Carrier Frequency
Synchronization
LAN IP Address
Review and Save Configuration
Copyright Notices
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Table 58 Identity-based user account permissions - SM
Menu
Menu Tab
ADMIN
INSTALLER
TECH
Home
General Status
Event Log
Network Interface
Layer2 Neighbors
Configuration General
IP
Radio
SNMP
Quality of Service (QoS)
Security
VLAN
VLAN Membership
DiffServ
Protocol Filtering
Port Configuration
NAT
PPPoE
NAT Port Mapping
Syslog
Unit Settings
Statistics
Scheduler
Bridge Control Block
Bridging Table
Translation Table
Ethernet
Radio
VLAN
Data VC
Filter
NAT Stats
NAT DHCP
ARP
Overload
PPPoE Statistics
Peer Statistics
DNS Statistics
Syslog Statistics
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-131
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Tools
Logs
Accounts
PDA
Copyright
Logoff
Spectrum Analyzer
Alignment
Link Capacity Test
AP Evaluation
OFDM Frame Calculator
BER Results
Alignment Tool
Link Status
DNS Test
NAT Table
SM Session
SM Authentication
SM Authorization
PPPoE Session Log
EAP Radius Log
User Authentication and Access
Tracking
Change User Password
Add User
Delete User
Quick Status
Spectrum Results (PDA)
Information
AP Evaluation
AIM
Copyright Notices
Filtering protocols and ports
You can filter (block) specified protocols and ports from leaving the AP and SM and entering the network. This
protects the network from both intended and inadvertent packet loading or probing by network users. By
keeping the specified protocols or ports off the network, this feature also provides a level of protection to users
from each other.
Protocol and port filtering is set per AP/SM. Except for filtering of SNMP ports, filtering occurs as packets
leave the AP/SM. If an SM is configured to filter SNMP, then SNMP packets are blocked from entering the SM
and, thereby, from interacting with the SNMP portion of the protocol stack on the SM.
1-132
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Port Filtering with NAT Enabled
Where NAT is enabled on the SM, you can filter only the three user-defined ports. The following are example
situations in which you can configure port filtering where NAT is enabled.
•
To block a subscriber from using FTP, you can filter Ports 20 and 21 (the FTP ports) for both the TCP and
UDP protocols.
•
To block a subscriber from access to SNMP, you can filter Ports 161 and 162 (the SNMP ports) for both
the TCP and UDP protocols.
NOTE: In only the SNMP case, filtering occurs before the packet interacts with the protocol stack.
Protocol and Port Filtering with NAT Disabled
Where NAT is disabled on the SM, you can filter both protocols and the three user-defined ports. Using the
check boxes on the interface, you can either
•
allow all protocols except those that you wish to block.
•
block all protocols except those that you wish to allow.
You can allow or block any of the following protocols:
•
•
PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet)
Any or all of the following IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4) protocols:
SMB (Network Neighborhood)
SNMP
Up to 3 user-defined ports
All other IPv4 traffic (see Figure 32)
Uplink Broadcast
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol)
All others (see Figure 32)
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-133
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Figure 32 Categorical protocol filtering
BootP
Server
BootP
Client
IPv4
Multica
st
SNMP
All
Other
IPv4
User
Defined
Port 1
SMB
User
Defined
Port 2
User
Defined
Port 3
ARP
PPPoE
All
Others
The following are example situations in which you can configure protocol filtering where NAT is disabled:
1-134
•
If you block a subscriber from only PPoE and SNMP, then the subscriber retains access to all other
protocols and all ports.
•
If you block PPoE, IPv4, and Uplink Broadcast, and you also check the
All others selection, then only Address Resolution Protocol is not filtered.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
The ports that are filtered as a result of protocol selections in the Protocol Filtering tab of the SM are listed in
Table 59.
Table 59 Ports filtered per protocol selections
Protocol Selected
Port Filtered (Blocked)
SMB
Destination Ports 137 TCP and UDP, 138 UDP, 139 TCP, 445 TCP
SNMP
Destination Ports 161 TCP and UDP, 162 TCP and UDP
Bootp Client
Source Port 68 UDP
Bootp Server
Source Port 67 UDP
Port Lockdown
Cambium devices support access to various communication protocols and only the ports required for these
protocols are available for access by external entities. Operators may change the port numbers for these
protocols via the radio GUI or SNMP.
Table 60 Device default port numbers
Port
Usage
Port Usage
Device
21
FTP
Listen Port
AP, SM
80
HTTP
Listen Port
AP, SM
1812
Standard RADIUS port
Destination Port
AP
1813
Standard RADIUS accounting
port
Destination Port
AP, SM
161
SNMP port
Listen Port
AP, SM
162
SNMP trap port
Destination Port
AP, SM
514
Syslog
Destination Port
AP, SM
Isolating SMs
In an AP, you can prevent SMs in the sector from directly communicating with each other. In CMMmicro
Release 2.2 or later and the CMM4, you can prevent connected APs from directly communicating with each
other, which prevents SMs that are in different sectors of a cluster from communicating with each other.
In the AP, the SM Isolation parameter is available in the General tab of the Configuration web page. In the
drop-down menu for that parameter, you can configure the SM Isolation feature by any of the following
selections:
•
Disable SM Isolation (the default selection). This allows full communication between SMs.
•
Block SM Packets from being forwarded. This prevents both multicast/broadcast and unicast SM-to-SM
communication.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-135
PMP 450 Planning Guide
•
Block and Forward SM Packets to Backbone. This not only prevents multicast/broadcast and unicast SMto-SM communication but also sends the packets, which otherwise would have been handled SM to SM,
through the Ethernet port of the AP.
In the CMMmicro and the CMM4, SM isolation treatment is the result of how you choose to manage the portbased VLAN feature of the embedded switch, where you can switch all traffic from any AP to an uplink port
that you specify. However, this is not packet level switching. It is not based on VLAN IDs. See the VLAN Port
Configuration parameter in the dedicated user guide that supports the CMM product that you are deploying.
Filtering management through Ethernet
You can configure the SM to disallow any device that is connected to its Ethernet port from accessing the IP
address of the SM. If you set the Ethernet Access Control parameter to Enabled, then
•
no attempt to access the SM management interface (by http, SNMP, ftp, or tftp) through Ethernet can
succeed.
•
any attempt to access the SM management interface over the air (by IP address, presuming that LAN1
Network Interface Configuration, Network Accessibility is set to Public, or by link from the Session Status
or Remote Subscribers tab in the AP) is unaffected.
Allowing management from only specified IP addresses
The Security tab of the Configuration web page in the AP and SM includes the IP Access Control parameter.
You can specify one, two, or three IP addresses that should be allowed to access the management interface (by
HTTP, SNMP, FTP, or TFTP).
If you select
•
IP Access Filtering Disabled, then management access is allowed from any IP address, even if the Allowed
Source IP 1 to 3 parameters are populated.
•
IP Access Filtering Enabled, and specify at least one address in the Allowed Source IP 1 to 3 parameter,
then management access is limited to the specified address(es).
Configuring management IP by DHCP
The IP tab in the Configuration web page of every radio contains a LAN1 Network Interface Configuration,
DHCP State parameter that, if enabled, causes the IP configuration (IP address, subnet mask, and gateway IP
address) to be obtained through DHCP instead of the values of those individual parameters. The setting of this
DHCP state parameter is also viewable, but is not settable, in the Network Interface tab of the Home page.
In the SM, this parameter is settable
1-136
•
in the NAT tab of the Configuration web page, but only if NAT is enabled.
•
in the IP tab of the Configuration web page, but only if the Network Accessibility parameter in the IP tab
is set to Public.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Planning for airlink security
Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP systems employ the following form of encryption for security of the
wireless link:
•
DES (Data Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses secret 56-bit keys and 8
parity bits. DES performs a series of bit permutations, substitutions, and recombination operations on
blocks of data. DES encryption does not affect the performance or throughput of the system.
•
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses the Rijndael
algorithm and 128-bit keys to establish a higher level of security than DES. AES products are certified as
compliant with the Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS 197) in the U.S.A.
Planning for RF Telnet Access Control
The RF Telnet Access feature restricts Telnet access to the AP from a device situated below a network SM
(downstream from the AP). This is a security enhancement to restrict RF-interface sourced AP access
specifically to the LAN1 IP address and LAN2 IP address (Radio Private Address, typically
192.168.101.[LUID]). This restriction disallows unauthorized users from running Telnet commands on the AP
that can change AP configuration or modifying network-critical components such as routing and ARP tables.
Forwarding Downlink PPPoE PADI packets
The AP supports the control of forwarding of PPPoE PADI (PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation) packets.
This forwarding is configured on the AP GUI Configuration, Radio tab by parameter PPPoE PADI Downlink
Forwarding. When set to “Enabled”, the AP allows downstream and upstream transmission of PPPoE PADI
packets. When set to “Disabled”, the AP will NOT allow PPPoE PADI packets to be sent out of the AP RF
interface (downstream) but will allow PPPoE PADI packets to enter the RF interface (upstream) and exit the
Ethernet interface.
Planning for RADIUS integration
PMP 450 modules include support for the RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service) protocol
supporting Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA).
RADIUS Functions
RADIUS protocol support provides the following functions:
•
SM Authentication allows only known SMs onto the network (blocking “rogue” SMs), and can be
configured to ensure SMs are connecting to a known network (preventing SMs from connecting to
“rogue” APs). RADIUS authentication is used for SMs, but is not used for APs. Cambium modules
support EAP-TTLS and EAP-MSCHAPv2 authentication methods.
•
SM Configuration: Configures authenticated SMs with MIR (Maximum Information Rate), CIR
(Committed Information Rate), High Priority, and VLAN (Virtual LAN) parameters from the RADIUS
server when an SM registers to an AP.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-137
PMP 450 Planning Guide
•
SM Accounting provides support for RADIUS accounting messages for usage-based billing. This
accounting includes indications for subscriber session establishment, subscriber session disconnection, and
bandwidth usage per session for each SM that connects to the AP.
•
Centralized AP and SM user name and password management allows AP and SM usernames and access
levels (Administrator, Installer, Technician) to be centrally administered in the RADIUS server instead
of on each radio and tracks access events (logon/logoff) for each username on the RADIUS server. This
accounting does not track and report specific configuration actions performed on radios or pull statistics
such as bit counts from the radios. Such functions require an Element Management System (EMS) such
as Cambium Networks Wireless Manager. This accounting is not the ability to perform accounting
functions on the subscriber/end user/customer account.
•
Framed IP allows operators to use a RADIUS server to assign management IP addressing to SM modules
(framed IP address).
Planning for SNMP security
Canopy modules provide the following Configuration web page parameters in the SNMP tab. These govern
SNMP access from the manager to the agent:
1-138
•
Community String, which specifies the password for security between managers and the agent.
•
Accessing Subnet, which specifies the subnet mask that allows managers to poll the agents.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Ordering components
This section describes how to select components for PMP 450 Greenfield network or PMP 450 network
migration. It specifies Cambium part numbers for PMP 450 components.
PMP 450 component part numbers
Table 61 PMP 450 components
Part Number
Product Description
Sales Models
C024045A001A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, AES
C024045A002A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, DES
C024045C001A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C024045C002A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C024045C003A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C024045C004A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C024045C005A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C024045C006A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C024045C007A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C024045C008A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C035045A001A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, AES
C035045A002A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, DES
C035045C001A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C035045C002A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C035045C003A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C035045C004A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-139
PMP 450 Planning Guide
C035045C005A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C035045C006A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C035045C007A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C035045C008A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C036045A001A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, AES
C036045A002A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, DES
C036045C001A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C036045C002A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C036045C003A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C036045C004A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C036045C005A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C036045C006A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C036045C007A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C036045C008A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C054045A001A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point
C054045A002A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US
C054045C005A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C054045C006A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C054045C007A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C054045C008A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
AP Antenna Options
1-140
85009324001
5 GHz Antenna for 90 Degree Sector
85009325001
5 GHz Antenna for 60 Degree Sector
C024045D601A
2.4 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 60 Degree Sector
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
C030045D901A
3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 90 Degree Sector
30009406002
N-type to N-type cable (16 inch length)
AP Optional
Equipment
ACPSSW-20A
POWER SUPPLY,20W, 29.5V, 100-240VAC/50-60HZ
ACPSSW-21A
POWER SUPPLY,20W,29.5V,100-240VAC/50-60HZ +C8 AC
ACPS120WA
POWER SUPPLY,120W 30VDC AT 60C 100-240VAC EL5
600SSH
SURGE PROTECTOR
SMMB2A
UNIVERSAL MOUNTING BRACKET
1070CKHH
CMM MICRO (OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE)
1090CKHH
CMM4 W/RUGGEDIZED SWITCH AND GPS
1091HH
CMM4 NO SWITCH
1092HH
CMM4 RACK MOUNT ASSEMBLY
1096H
UNIVERSAL GPS MODULE
SM Optional
Equipment
ACPSSW-09B
POWER SUPPLY,13.6W, 29.5V, 100-240VAC/50-60HZ
ACPSSW-10B
POWER SUPPLY,13.6W,29.5V,100-240VAC/50-60HZ+ARG
ACPSSW-11B
POWER SUPPLY, 13.6W,29.5V,100-240VAC/50-60HZ+AUS
ACPSSW-12C
POWER SUPPLY,ASSY,P/S,29.5V90-240VAC/50-60HZ PS
ACPSSW-13B
POWER SUPPLY,13.6W,29.5V,100-240/50-60+FIXED US
ACPSSW-14A
POWER SUPPLY,13.6W,29.5V,100-240VAC/50-60HZ+BRAZ
HK2022A
53CM OFFSET, REFLECTOR DISH KIT,4PK
SMMB1A
UNIVERSAL MOUNTING KIT
600SSH
SURGE PROTECTOR
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-141
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Upgrade Keys
C000045K002A
PMP 450 4 TO 10 MBPS UPGRADE KEY
C000045K003A
PMP 450 4 TO 20 MBPS UPGRADE KEY
C000045K004A
PMP 450 4 TO Uncapped UPGRADE KEY
C000045K005A
PMP 450 10 TO 20 MBPS UPGRADE KEY
C000045K006A
PMP 450 10 TO Uncapped MBPS UPGRADE KEY
C000045K007A
PMP 450 20 TO Uncapped MBPS UPGRADE KEY
Extended Warranty
SG00TS4009A
PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 1 Additional Year
SG00TS4017A
PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 2 Additional Years
SG00TS4025A
PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 4 Additional Years
SG00TS4010A
PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 1 Additional Year
SG00TS4018A
PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 2 Additional Years
SG00TS4026A
PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 4 Additional Years
Part Number
Product Description
Sales Models
1-142
C024045A001A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, AES
C024045A002A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, DES
C024045C001A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C024045C002A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C024045C003A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
C024045C004A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C024045C005A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C024045C006A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C024045C007A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C024045C008A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C035045A001A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, AES
C035045A002A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, DES
C035045C001A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C035045C002A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C035045C003A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C035045C004A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C035045C005A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C035045C006A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C035045C007A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C035045C008A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C036045A001A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, AES
C036045A002A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, DES
C036045C001A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C036045C002A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C036045C003A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C036045C004A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C036045C005A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C036045C006A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C036045C007A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-143
PMP 450 Planning Guide
C036045C008A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C054045A001A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point
C054045A002A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US
C054045C005A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C054045C006A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C054045C007A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C054045C008A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
AP Antenna Options
85009324001
5 GHz Antenna for 90 Degree Sector
85009325001
5 GHz Antenna for 60 Degree Sector
C024045D601A
2.4 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 60 Degree Sector
C030045D901A
3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 90 Degree Sector
30009406002
N-type to N-type cable (16 inch length)
AP Optional
Equipment
1-144
ACPSSW-20A
POWER SUPPLY,20W, 29.5V, 100-240VAC/50-60HZ
ACPSSW-21A
POWER SUPPLY,20W,29.5V,100-240VAC/50-60HZ +C8 AC
ACPS120WA
POWER SUPPLY,120W 30VDC AT 60C 100-240VAC EL5
600SSH
SURGE PROTECTOR
SMMB2A
UNIVERSAL MOUNTING BRACKET
1070CKHH
CMM MICRO (OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE)
1090CKHH
CMM4 W/RUGGEDIZED SWITCH AND GPS
1091HH
CMM4 NO SWITCH
1092HH
CMM4 RACK MOUNT ASSEMBLY
1096H
UNIVERSAL GPS MODULE
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
SM Optional
Equipment
ACPSSW-09B
POWER SUPPLY,13.6W, 29.5V, 100-240VAC/50-60HZ
ACPSSW-10B
POWER SUPPLY,13.6W,29.5V,100-240VAC/50-60HZ+ARG
ACPSSW-11B
POWER SUPPLY, 13.6W,29.5V,100-240VAC/50-60HZ+AUS
ACPSSW-12C
POWER SUPPLY,ASSY,P/S,29.5V90-240VAC/50-60HZ PS
ACPSSW-13B
POWER SUPPLY,13.6W,29.5V,100-240/50-60+FIXED US
ACPSSW-14A
POWER SUPPLY,13.6W,29.5V,100-240VAC/50-60HZ+BRAZ
HK2022A
53CM OFFSET, REFLECTOR DISH KIT,4PK
SMMB1A
UNIVERSAL MOUNTING KIT
600SSH
SURGE PROTECTOR
Upgrade Keys
C000045K002A
PMP 450 4 TO 10 MBPS UPGRADE KEY
C000045K003A
PMP 450 4 TO 20 MBPS UPGRADE KEY
C000045K004A
PMP 450 4 TO Uncapped UPGRADE KEY
C000045K005A
PMP 450 10 TO 20 MBPS UPGRADE KEY
C000045K006A
PMP 450 10 TO Uncapped MBPS UPGRADE KEY
C000045K007A
PMP 450 20 TO Uncapped MBPS UPGRADE KEY
Extended Warranty
SG00TS4009A
PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 1 Additional Year
SG00TS4017A
PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 2 Additional Years
SG00TS4025A
PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 4 Additional Years
SG00TS4010A
PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 1 Additional Year
SG00TS4018A
PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 2 Additional Years
SG00TS4026A
PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 4 Additional Years
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
1-145
PMP 450 Planning Guide
1-146
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Chapter 2:
List of Tables
Legal information
This chapter provides legal notices including software license agreements.
Intentional or unintentional changes or modifications to the equipment must not be made unless under the
express consent of the party responsible for compliance. Any such modifications could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment and will void the manufacturer’s warranty.
The following topics are described in this chapter:
•
Cambium Networks end user license agreement on page 2-2
•
Hardware warranty on page 2-10
•
Limit of liability on page 2-11
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Acceptance of this agreement
In connection with Cambium’s delivery of certain proprietary software or products containing embedded or preloaded proprietary software, or both, Cambium is willing to license this certain proprietary software and the
accompanying documentation to you only on the condition that you accept all the terms in this End User
License Agreement (“Agreement”).
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THE PRODUCT OR
INSTALL THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, YOU MAY, FOR A FULL REFUND, RETURN THIS
PRODUCT TO THE LOCATION WHERE YOU ACQUIRED IT OR PROVIDE WRITTEN
VERIFICATION OF DELETION OF ALL COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE PRODUCT, WILL CONSTITUTE
YOUR ACCEPTANCE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
Definitions
In this Agreement, the word “Software” refers to the set of instructions for computers, in executable form and
in any media, (which may include diskette, CD-ROM, downloadable internet, hardware, or firmware) licensed
to you. The word “Documentation” refers to electronic or printed manuals and accompanying instructional
aids licensed to you. The word “Product” refers to Cambium’s fixed wireless broadband devices for which the
Software and Documentation is licensed for use.
Grant of license
Cambium Networks Limited (“Cambium”) grants you (“Licensee” or “you”) a personal, nonexclusive, nontransferable license to use the Software and Documentation subject to the Conditions of Use set forth in
“Conditions of use” and the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any terms or conditions relating to the
Software and Documentation appearing on the face or reverse side of any purchase order, purchase order
acknowledgment or other order document that are different from, or in addition to, the terms of this
Agreement will not be binding on the parties, even if payment is accepted.
Conditions of use
Any use of the Software and Documentation outside of the conditions set forth in this Agreement is strictly
prohibited and will be deemed a breach of this Agreement.
1. Only you, your employees or agents may use the Software and Documentation. You will take all necessary
steps to insure that your employees and agents abide by the terms of this Agreement.
2-2
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
2. You will use the Software and Documentation (i) only for your internal business purposes; (ii) only as
described in the Software and Documentation; and (iii) in strict accordance with this Agreement.
3. You may use the Software and Documentation, provided that the use is in conformance with the terms set
forth in this Agreement.
4. Portions of the Software and Documentation are protected by United States copyright laws, international
treaty provisions, and other applicable laws. Therefore, you must treat the Software like any other
copyrighted material (for example, a book or musical recording) except that you may either: (i) make 1 copy of
the transportable part of the Software (which typically is supplied on diskette, CD-ROM, or downloadable
internet), solely for back-up purposes; or (ii) copy the transportable part of the Software to a PC hard disk,
provided you keep the original solely for back-up purposes. If the Documentation is in printed form, it may
not be copied. If the Documentation is in electronic form, you may print out 1 copy, which then may not be
copied. With regard to the copy made for backup or archival purposes, you agree to reproduce any Cambium
copyright notice, and other proprietary legends appearing thereon. Such copyright notice(s) may appear in
any of several forms, including machine-readable form, and you agree to reproduce such notice in each form in
which it appears, to the extent it is physically possible to do so. Unauthorized duplication of the Software or
Documentation constitutes copyright infringement, and in the United States is punishable in federal court by
fine and imprisonment.
5. You will not transfer, directly or indirectly, any product, technical data or software to any country for which
the United States Government requires an export license or other governmental approval without first
obtaining such license or approval.
Title and restrictions
If you transfer possession of any copy of the Software and Documentation to another party outside of the terms
of this agreement, your license is automatically terminated. Title and copyrights to the Software and
Documentation and any copies made by you remain with Cambium and its licensors. You will not, and will
not permit others to: (i) modify, translate, decompile, bootleg, reverse engineer, disassemble, or extract the
inner workings of the Software or Documentation, (ii) copy the look-and-feel or functionality of the Software or
Documentation; (iii) remove any proprietary notices, marks, labels, or logos from the Software or
Documentation; (iv) rent or transfer all or some of the Software or Documentation to any other party without
Cambium’s prior written consent; or (v) utilize any computer software or hardware which is designed to defeat
any copy protection device, should the Software and Documentation be equipped with such a protection
device. If the Software and Documentation is provided on multiple types of media (such as diskette, CD-ROM,
downloadable internet), then you will only use the medium which best meets your specific needs, and will not
loan, rent, lease, or transfer the other media contained in the package without Cambium’s written consent.
Unauthorized copying of the Software or Documentation, or failure to comply with any of the provisions of
this Agreement, will result in automatic termination of this license.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
2-3
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Confidentiality
You acknowledge that all Software and Documentation contain valuable proprietary information and trade
secrets and that unauthorized or improper use of the Software and Documentation will result in irreparable
harm to Cambium for which monetary damages would be inadequate and for which Cambium will be entitled
to immediate injunctive relief. If applicable, you will limit access to the Software and Documentation to those
of your employees and agents who need to use the Software and Documentation for your internal business
purposes, and you will take appropriate action with those employees and agents to preserve the confidentiality
of the Software and Documentation, using the same degree of care to avoid unauthorized or improper
disclosure as you use for the protection of your own proprietary software, but in no event less than reasonable
care.
You have no obligation to preserve the confidentiality of any proprietary information that: (i) was in the
public domain at the time of disclosure; (ii) entered the public domain through no fault of yours; (iii) was given
to you free of any obligation to keep it confidential; (iv) is independently developed by you; or (v) is disclosed
as required by law provided that you notify Cambium prior to such disclosure and provide Cambium with a
reasonable opportunity to respond.
Right to use Cambium’s name
Except as required in “Conditions of use”, you will not, during the term of this Agreement or thereafter, use any
trademark of Cambium, or any word or symbol likely to be confused with any Cambium trademark, either
alone or in any combination with another word or words.
Transfer
The Software and Documentation may not be transferred to another party without the express written consent
of Cambium, regardless of whether or not such transfer is accomplished by physical or electronic means.
Cambium’s consent may be withheld at its discretion and may be conditioned upon transferee paying all
applicable license fees and agreeing to be bound by this Agreement.
Updates
During the first 12 months after purchase of a Product, or during the term of any executed Maintenance and
Support Agreement for the Product, you are entitled to receive Updates. An “Update” means any code in any
form which is a bug fix, patch, error correction, or minor enhancement, but excludes any major feature added
to the Software. Updates are available for download at the support website.
Major features may be available from time to time for an additional license fee. If Cambium makes available to
you major features and no other end user license agreement is provided, then the terms of this Agreement will
apply.
2-4
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Maintenance
Except as provided above, Cambium is not responsible for maintenance or field service of the Software under
this Agreement.
Disclaimer
CAMBIUM DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED,
STATUTORY, OR IN ANY COMMUNICATION WITH YOU. CAMBIUM SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS
ANY WARRANTY INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILTY,
NONINFRINGEMENT, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE AND
DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.” CAMBIUM DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE
SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. CAMBIUM MAKES NO WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THE
CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so the above exclusion may not apply to
you.
Limitation of liability
THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF CAMBIUM UNDER THIS AGREEMENT FOR DAMAGES WILL NOT
EXCEED THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE PRODUCT LICENSED UNDER THIS
AGREEMENT. IN NO EVENT WILL CAMBIUM BE LIABLE IN ANY WAY FOR INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST BUSINESS PROFITS, OR LIABILITY OR INJURY TO THIRD
PERSONS, WHETHER FORESEEABLE OR NOT, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER CAMBIUM HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBLITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some jurisdictions do not permit
limitations of liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusions may not apply to you.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
2-5
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
U.S. government
If you are acquiring the Product on behalf of any unit or agency of the U.S. Government, the following applies.
Use, duplication, or disclosure of the Software and Documentation is subject to the restrictions set forth in
subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software – Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.22719 (JUNE 1987), if applicable, unless being provided to the Department of Defense. If being provided to the
Department of Defense, use, duplication, or disclosure of the Products is subject to the restricted rights set
forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS
252.227-7013 (OCT 1988), if applicable. Software and Documentation may or may not include a Restricted
Rights notice, or other notice referring specifically to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. The terms
and conditions of this Agreement will each continue to apply, but only to the extent that such terms and
conditions are not inconsistent with the rights provided to you under the aforementioned provisions of the
FAR and DFARS, as applicable to the particular procuring agency and procurement transaction.
Term of license
Your right to use the Software will continue in perpetuity unless terminated as follows. Your right to use the
Software will terminate immediately without notice upon a breach of this Agreement by you. Within 30 days
after termination of this Agreement, you will certify to Cambium in writing that through your best efforts, and
to the best of your knowledge, the original and all copies, in whole or in part, in any form, of the Software and
all related material and Documentation, have been destroyed, except that, with prior written consent from
Cambium, you may retain one copy for archival or backup purposes. You may not sublicense, assign or
transfer the license or the Product, except as expressly provided in this Agreement. Any attempt to otherwise
sublicense, assign or transfer any of the rights, duties or obligations hereunder is null and void.
Governing law
This Agreement is governed by the laws of the United States of America to the extent that they apply and
otherwise by the laws of the State of Illinois.
Assignment
This agreement may not be assigned by you without Cambium’s prior written consent.
Survival of provisions
The parties agree that where the context of any provision indicates an intent that it survives the term of this
Agreement, then it will survive.
2-6
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Entire agreement
This agreement contains the parties’ entire agreement regarding your use of the Software and may be amended
only in writing signed by both parties, except that Cambium may modify this Agreement as necessary to
comply with applicable laws.
Third party software
The software may contain one or more items of Third-Party Software supplied by other third-party suppliers.
The terms of this Agreement govern your use of any Third-Party Software UNLESS A SEPARATE THIRDPARTY SOFTWARE LICENSE IS INCLUDED, IN WHICH CASE YOUR USE OF THE THIRD-PARTY
SOFTWARE WILL THEN BE GOVERNED BY THE SEPARATE THIRD-PARTY LICENSE.
ZLIB Copyright Notice
Copyright © 1995-1998 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held
liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to
alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original
software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original
software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly
jloup@gzip.org
Mark Adler
madler@alumni.caltech.edu
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
2-7
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Modernizr Copyright Notice
MIT License
Copyright © 2009-2010 Faruk Ates
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above
copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the
Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
BSD License
Copyright © 2010, Faruk Ates All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the Organization nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
D3 Copyright Notice
Copyright (c) 2013, Michael Bostock All rights reserved.
2-8
•
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
•
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
•
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
•
The name Michael Bostock may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL MICHAEL BOSTOCK BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
2-9
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Hardware warranty
Cambium’s standard hardware warranty is for one (1) year from date of shipment from Cambium or a
Cambium Point-To-Point Distributor. Cambium warrants that hardware will conform to the relevant
published specifications and will be free from material defects in material and workmanship under normal use
and service. Cambium shall within this time, at its own option, either repair or replace the defective product
within thirty (30) days of receipt of the defective product. Repaired or replaced product will be subject to the
original warranty period but not less than thirty (30) days.
2-10
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Limit of liability
IN NO EVENT SHALL CAMBIUM NETWORKS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PARTY FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY
OR OTHER DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT
(INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS, OR
FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY, EVEN IF CAMBIUM HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. (Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above exclusion or limitation may not apply to you.) IN NO CASE SHALL
CAMBIUM’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
2-11
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Chapter 3:
Glossary
Reference information
This chapter contains reference information and regulatory notices that apply to the PMP 450 Series products.
The following topics are described in this chapter:
•
Equipment specifications on page 3-2 contains specifications of the AP, SM and other equipment required
for PMP 450 installations.
•
Wireless specifications on page 3-10 contains specifications of the PMP 450 wireless interface, including RF
bands, channel width and link loss.
•
Data network specifications on page 3-11 contains specifications of the PMP 450 Ethernet interface.
•
Compliance with safety standards on page 3-12 lists the safety specifications against which the PMP 450
has been tested and certified. It also describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits.
•
Compliance with radio regulations on page 3-16 describes how the PMP 450 complies with the radio
regulations that are enforced in various countries.
•
Notifications on page 3-42 has notifications made to regulatory bodies for the PMP 450.
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Equipment specifications
This section contains specifications of the AP, SM, associated supplies required for PMP 450 installations.
AP specifications
The PMP 450 AP conforms to the specifications listed in Table 62. These specifications apply to all PMP 450
product variants (except where noted).
Table 62 Connectorized AP physical specifications
Category
Specification
Product
Model
Number
2.4 GHz
C024045A001A, C024045A003A
3.5 GHz
C035045A001A, C035045A002A, C035045A003A, C035045A004A
3.6 GHz
C036045A001A, C036045A002A, C036045A003A, C036045A004A
5 GHz
C054045A001A, C054045A002A, C054045A003A
Channel
Spacing
5 MHz
Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments (2.4GHz, 5 GHz)
10 MHz 20
MHz
channel
bandwidth
Configurable on 50 kHz increments (3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz)
Frequency
Range
2.4 GHz
2400 – 2483.5 MHz
3.5 GHz
3300 – 3600 MHz (dependent upon Region Code setting)
3.6 GHz
3650 – 3700 MHz (dependent upon Region Code setting)
5 GHz
5470 – 5875 MHz (dependent upon Region Code setting)
Spectrum
Channel Width
5 MHz (2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz and 5.8 GHz only), 10 MHz or 20 MHz
Interface
3-2
MAC (Media Access
Control) Layer
Cambium Proprietary
Physical Layer
2x2 MIMO OFDM
Ethernet Interface
10/100BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated (802.3 compliant)
Protocols Used
IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, SNMP, HTTP, FTP, RADIUS
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Category
Specification
Network Management
HTTP, FTP, SNMP v2c, Syslog
VLAN
802.1ad (DVLAN Q-inQ), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority, dynamic port VID
Performance
Nominal
Receive
Sensitivity
(w/ FEC) @
5 MHz
Channel,
Single
Branch
Nominal
Receive
Sensitivity
(w/ FEC) @
10 MHz
Channel,
Single
Branch
Nominal
Receive
Sensitivity
(w/ FEC) @
20 MHz
Channel,
Single
Branch
2.4 GHz
OFDM: 1x = -91 dBm, 2x = -91 dBm, 4x = -86 dBm, 6x = -78 dBm, 8x = 68 dBm
3.5 GHz
OFDM: 1x = -92 dBm, 2x = -92 dBm, 4x = -86 dBm, 6x = -80 dBm, 8x = 73 dBm
3.6 GHz
OFDM: 1x = -92 dBm, 2x = -92 dBm, 4x = -86 dBm, 6x = -80 dBm, 8x = 73 dBm
5.4 GHz
OFDM: 1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -90 dBm, 4x = -84 dBm, 6x = -80 dBm, 8x = 64 dBm
5.8 GHz
OFDM: 1x = -91 dBm, 2x = -91 dBm, 4x = -85 dBm, 6x = -79 dBm, 8x = 69 dBm
2.4 GHz
OFDM: 1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -90 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x = -76 dBm, 8x = 66 dBm
3.5 GHz
OFDM: 1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -90 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x = -77 dBm, 8x = 70 dBm
3.6 GHz
OFDM: 1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -90 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x = -77 dBm, 8x = 70 dBm
5.4 GHz
OFDM: 1x = -88 dBm, 2x = -88 dBm, 4x = -82 dBm, 6x = -75 dBm, 8x = 62 dBm
5.8 GHz
OFDM: 1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -90 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x = -76 dBm, 8x = 64 dBm
2.4 GHz
OFDM: 1x = -86 dBm, 2x = -86 dBm, 4x = -80 dBm, 6x = -73 dBm, 8x = 66 dBm
3.5 GHz
OFDM: 1x = -87 dBm, 2x = -87 dBm, 4x = -80 dBm, 6x = -73 dBm, 8x = 66 dBm
3.6 GHz
OFDM: 1x = -87 dBm, 2x = -87 dBm, 4x = -80 dBm, 6x = -73 dBm, 8x = 66 dBm
5.4 GHz
OFDM: 1x = -86 dBm, 2x = -86 dBm, 4x = -79 dBm, 6x = -72 dBm, 8x = 61 dBm
5.8 GHz
OFDM: 1x = -87 dBm, 2x = -87 dBm, 4x = -80 dBm, 6x = -72 dBm, 8x = 62 dBm
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-3
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Category
Maximum
Deployment
Range
Glossary
Specification
2.4 GHz
Up to 64 km (40 mi)
3.5 GHz
Up to 64 km (40 mi)
3.6 GHz
Up to 64 km (40 mi)
5 GHz
Up to 40 km (25 mi)
Subscribers Per Sector
Up to 238
ARQ
Yes
Cyclic Prefix
1/16
Modulation Levels
(Adaptive)
QPSK, QPSK (MIMO-B), 16-QAM (MIMO-B), 64-QAM (MIMO-B), 256QAM (MIMO-B)
Latency
3 - 5 ms
Packets Per Second
12, 500
GPS Synchronization
Yes, via CMM3, CMM4, or UGPS
Quality of Service
Diffserv QoS
Link Budget
Combined Transmit
Power
-30 to +22 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) in 1 dB-configurable intervals
(2.4 GHz, 5 GHz)
-30 to +25 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) in 1 dB-configurable intervals
(3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz)
Antenna
Gain
2.4 GHz
17 dBi Dual Slant
3.5 GHz
17 dBi Dual Slant
3.6 GHz
17 dBi Dual Slant
5 GHz
17 dBi Horizontal and Vertical
Maximum Transmit
Power
22 dBm combined OFDM (2.4GHz, 5 GHz)
25 dBm combined OFDM (3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz)
Physical
Wind
Loading
3-4
2.4 GHz
216 km/hour (135 mi/hour)
3.5 GHz
216 km/hour (135 mi/hour)
3.6 GHz
216 km/hour (135 mi/hour)
5 GHz
190 km/hour (118 mi/hour)
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Category
Specification
Antenna Connection
50 ohm, N-type
Environmental
IP67
Temperature
-40ºC to +55ºC (-40ºF to +131ºF)
Weight
2.4 GHz
15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna
2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna
3.5 GHz
15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna
2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna
3.6 GHz
15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna
2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna
5 GHz
5.9 kg (13 lbs) with antenna
2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna
Dimensions
(H x W x
D)
2.4 GHz
Radio: 27 x 21 x 7 cm (10.6” x 8.3” x 2.8”)
Antenna: 112.2 x 24.5 x 11.7 cm (44.2” x 9.6” x 4.6”)
3.5 GHz
15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna
2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna
3.6 GHz
15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna
2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna
5 GHz
Radio: 27 x 21 x 7 cm (10.6” x 8.3” x 2.8”)
Antenna: 51 x 13 x 7.3 cm (20.2” x 5.1” x 2.9”)
Maximum Power
Consumption
14 W
Input Voltage
22 to 32 VDC
Security
Encryption
56-bit DES, AES
Certifications
FCC ID
Z8H89FT0002 (5.4, 5.8 GHz)
Z8H89FT0004 (2.4 GHz)
Z8H89FT0010 (3.6 GHz)
Industry Canada Cert
109W-0002 (5.4, 5.8 GHz)
109W-0004 (2.4 GHz)
109W-0008 (3.5 GHz)
109W-0010 (3.6 GHz)
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-5
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Category
Specification
CE
EN 301 893 v1.6.1 (5.4 GHz)
EN 302 502 v1.2.1 (5.8 GHz)
3-6
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
SM specifications
The PMP 450 SM conforms to the specifications listed in
Table 63. These specifications apply to all PMP 450 product variants.
Table 63 SM physical specifications
Category
Specification
Product
Model
Number
2.4 GHz
C024045C001A, C024045C002A, C024045C003A, C024045C004A,
C024045C005A, C024045C006A, C024045C007A, C024045C008A
3.5 GHz
C035045C001A, C035045C002A, C035045C003A, C035045C004A,
C035045C005A, C035045C006A, C035045C007A, C035045C008A
3.6 GHz
C036045C001A, C036045C002A, C036045C003A, C036045C004A,
C036045C005A, C036045C006A, C036045C007A, C036045C008A
5 GHz
C054045C001A, C054045C002A, C054045C003A, C054045C004A,
C054045C005A, C054045C006A, C054045C007A, C054045C008A,
Channel
Spacing
5 MHz
Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments (2.4GHz, 5 GHz)
10MHz, 20
MHz channel
bandwidth
Configurable on 50 kHz increments (3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz)
Frequency
Range
2.4 GHz
2400 – 2483.5 MHz
3.5 GHz
3300 – 3600 MHz (dependent upon Region Code setting)
3.6 GHz
3650 – 3700 MHz (dependent upon Region Code setting)
5 GHz
5470 – 5875 MHz (dependent upon Region Code setting)
Spectrum
Channel Width
5 MHz (2.4 GHz, 3.5GHz and 5.8 GHz only), 10 MHz or 20 MHz
Interface
MAC (Media Access Control)
Layer
Cambium Proprietary
Physical Layer
2x2 MIMO OFDM
Ethernet Interface
10/100BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated (802.3 compliant)
Protocols Used
IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, SNMP, HTTP, FTP, RADIUS
Network Management
HTTP, FTP, SNMP v2c, Syslog
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-7
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Category
Specification
VLAN
802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority, dynamic port
VID
Performance
Maximum
Deployment
Range
2.4 GHz
Up to 64 km (40 mi) with reflector dish
3.5 GHz
Up to 40 km (25 mi) with reflector dish
3.6 GHz
Up to 40 km (25 mi) with reflector dish
5 GHz
Up to 40 km (25 mi) with reflector dish
ARQ
Yes
Cyclic Prefix
1/16
Modulation Levels
(Adaptive)
1x = QPSK, 2x = QPSK-MIMO-B, 4x = 16-QAM-MIMO-B, 6x = 64QAM-MIMO-B, 8x = 256-QAM-MIMO-B
Latency
3 - 5 ms
GPS Synchronization
Yes
Quality of Service
Diffserv QoS
Link Budget
Antenna Beam Width
55º azimuth, 55º elevation (both horizontal and vertical)
Combined Transmit Power
-30 to +22 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) – 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz
-30 to +25 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) – 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz
Antenna
Gain
2.4 GHz
7 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch
3.5 GHz
8 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch
3.6 GHz
8 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch
5 GHz
9 dBi H+V, integrated patch
Maximum Transmit Power
22 dBm combined (2.4 GHz, 5 GHz)
25 dBm combined (3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz)
Reflector
Gain
2.4 GHz
+12 dBi
3.5 GHz
+11 dBi
3.6 GHz
+11 dBi
5 GHz
+14 dBi
CLIP Gain (5 GHz only)
3-8
+8 dBi
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Category
Specification
LENS Gain (5 GHz only)
+5.5 dBi
Physical
Wind Loading
190 km/hour (118 mi/hour)
Environmental
IP55
Temperature
-40ºC to +55ºC (-40ºF to +131ºF)
Weight
0.45 kg (1 lb)
Dimensions (H x W x D)
30 x 9 x 9 cm (11.75” x 3.4” x 3.4”)
Maximum Power
Consumption
12 W
Input Voltage
20 - 32 VDC
Security
Encryption
56-bit DES, AES
Certifications
FCC ID
Z8H89FT0001 (5.4, 5.8 GHz)
Z8H89FT0003 (2.4 GHz)
Z8H89FT0009 (3.6 GHz)
Industry Canada Cert
109W-0001 (5.4, 5.8 GHz)
109W-0003 (2.4 GHz)
109W-0007 (3.5 GHz)
109W-0009 (3.6 GHz)
CE
EN 301 893 v1.6.1 (5.4 GHz)
EN 302 502 v1.2.1 (5.8 GHz)
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-9
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Wireless specifications
This section contains specifications of the PMP 450 wireless interface. These specifications include RF bands,
channel bandwidth, spectrum settings, maximum power and link loss.
General wireless specifications
Table 64 lists the wireless specifications that apply to all PMP 450 variants.
Table 64 PMP 450 wireless specifications
Item
Specification
Channel selection
Manual selection (fixed frequency).
Manual power control
To avoid interference to other users of the band, maximum power can be
set lower than the default power limit.
Duplex scheme
Adaptive TDD
Range
3-10
2.4 GHz
40 mi / 64 km
3.5 GHz
40 mi / 64 km
3.6 GHz
40 mi / 64 km
5 GHz
25 mi / 40 km
Over-the-air encryption
DES, AES
Error Correction
FEC
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Data network specifications
This section contains specifications of the PMP 450 Ethernet interface.
Ethernet interface
The PMP 450 Ethernet port conforms to the specifications listed in Table 65.
Table 65 PMP 450 Ethernet bridging specifications
Ethernet Bridging
Specification
Protocol
IEEE 802.3 compatible
QoS
IEEE 802.1p, IEEE 802.1Q, IEEE 802.1ad, DSCP IPv4
Interface
10/100/BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated
Maximum Ethernet Frame Size
1714 Bytes
Practical Ethernet rates will depend on network configuration, higher layer protocols and platforms used.
Over the air throughput is restricted to the rate of the Ethernet interface at the receiving end of the link.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-11
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Compliance with safety standards
This section lists the safety specifications against which the PMP 450 has been tested and certified. It also
describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits.
Electrical safety compliance
The PMP 450 hardware has been tested for compliance to the electrical safety specifications listed in Table 66.
Table 66 PMP 450 safety compliance specifications
Region
Specification
USA
UL 60950
Canada
CSA C22.2 No.60950
International
CB certified & certificate to IEC 60950
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance
Table 67 lists the EMC specification type approvals that have been granted for PMP 450.
Table 67 EMC emissions compliance
Variant
Region
Specification (Type Approvals)
PMP 450
USA
FCC Part 15 Class B
Canada
RSS Gen and RSS 210
International
EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2
EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1
3-12
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Human exposure to radio frequency energy
Standards
Relevant standards (USA and EC) applicable when working with RF equipment are:
•
ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio
Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz.
•
Council recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general public to
electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz) (1999/519/EC) and respective national regulations.
•
Directive 2004/40/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 29 April 2004 on the minimum
health and safety requirements regarding the exposure of workers to the risks arising from physical agents
(electromagnetic fields) (18th individual Directive within the meaning of Article 16(1) of Directive
89/391/EEC).
•
US FCC limits for the general population. See the FCC web site at http://www.fcc.gov, and the policies,
guidelines, and requirements in Part 1 of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations, as well as the
guidelines and suggestions for evaluating compliance in FCC OET Bulletin 65.
•
Health Canada limits for the general population. See the Health Canada web site at http://www.hcsc.gc.ca/ewh-semt/pubs/radiation/99ehd-dhm237/limits-limites_e.html and Safety Code 6.
•
EN 50383:2002 Basic standard for the calculation and measurement of electromagnetic field strength and
SAR related to human exposure from radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless
telecommunication systems (110 MHz - 40 GHz).
•
BS EN 50385:2002 Product standard to demonstrate the compliances of radio base stations and fixed
terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems with the basic restrictions or the reference levels
related to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields (110 MHz – 40 GHz) – general public.
•
ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) guidelines for the general
public. See the ICNIRP web site at http://www.icnirp.de/ and Guidelines for Limiting Exposure to TimeVarying Electric, Magnetic, and Electromagnetic Fields.
Power density exposure limit
Install the radios for the PMP 450 family of PMP wireless solutions so as to provide and maintain the
minimum separation distances from all persons.
The applicable power density exposure limit from the standards (see Human exposure to radio frequency
energy on page 3-13) is:
•
10 W/m2 for RF energy in the 2.4, 3.5GHz, 3.6 GHz, 5.4-GHz and 5.8-GHz frequency bands.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-13
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Calculation of power density
The following calculation is based on the ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991 method, as that provides a worst case
analysis. Details of the assessment to EN50383:2002 can be provided, if required.
Peak power density in the far field of a radio frequency point source is calculated as follows:
S=
P .G
4π d 2
Where:
Is:
power density in W/m2
maximum average transmit power
capability of the radio, in W
total Tx gain as a factor, converted from dB
distance from point source, in m
Rearranging terms to solve for distance yields:
d=
P.G
4π .S
Calculated distances and power compliance margins
Table 68 shows calculated minimum separation distances, recommended distances and resulting margins for
each frequency band and antenna combination. These are conservative distances that include compliance
margins. At these and greater separation distances, the power density from the RF field is below generally
accepted limits for the general population.
PMP 450 equipment adheres to all applicable EIRP limits for transmit power when operating in MIMO mode.
Separation distances and compliance margins include compensation for both transmitters.
Explanation of terms used in Table 68:
Tx burst – maximum average transmit power in burst (Watt)
P – maximum average transmit power capability of the radio (Watt) (combined transmitters)
G – total transmit gain as a factor, converted from dB
S – power density (W/m2)
d – minimum distance from point source (meters)
R – recommended distances (meters)
C – compliance factor
3-14
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Table 68 Power Compliance Margins
Frequency
Antenna
Band
Variable
5 GHz OFDM
Integrated SM, 9
dBi patch
0.158 W
(22 dBm)
7.9
(9 dB)
10 W/m2
Integrated SM, 9
dBi patch with 8
dBi CLIP
0.158 W
(22 dBm)
50 (17
dB)
10 W/m2
Integrated SM, 9
dBi patch with 5.5
dBi LENS
0.158 W
(22 dBm)
28 (14.5
dB)
10 W/m2
Integrated SM, 9
dBi patch with 14
dBi Reflector Dish
0.158 W
(22 dBm)
199 (23
dB)
10 W/m2
Integrated SM, 8
dBi patch
0.158 W
(22 dBm)
6.3
10 W/m2
(8 dB)
or 1
Integrated SM, 8
dBi patch with 12
dBi Reflector Dish
0.158 W
(22 dBm)
100 (20
dB)
10 W/m2
Integrated SM, 8
dBi patch
0.316 W
(25 dBm)
6.3
10 W/m2
(8 dB)
or 1
Integrated SM, 8
dBi patch with 11
dBi Reflector Dish
0.316 W
(25 dBm)
79.4 (19
dB)
10 W/m2
2.4, 5 GHz
OFDM
Connectorized AP,
with 17 dBi Sector
Antenna
0.158 W
(22 dBm)
50
10 W/m2
(17 dB)
or 1
3.5, 3.6 GHz
OFDM
Connectorized AP,
with 17 dBi Sector
Antenna
0.316 W
(25 dBm)
50
10 W/m2
2.4 GHz
OFDM
3.5, 3.6 GHz
OFDM
(17 dB)
Recommended
Power
Separation
Compliance
Distance
Margin
10 cm
20 cm
(8 in)
40.27
25 cm
50 cm (20 in)
39.7
18.7 cm
50 cm (20 in)
71.01
50 cm
100 cm (40 in)
40
8.9 cm
20 cm (8 in)
50.5
35 cm
100 cm (40 in)
79.5
12.5 cm
50 cm (8 in)
160
44.6 cm
100 cm (40 in)
50.2
25.1 cm
50 cm (20 in)
39.8
35.4 cm
100 cm (40 in)
79.7
or 1 mW/cm2
or 1 mW/cm2
or 1 mW/cm2
or 1 mW/cm2
mW/cm2
or 1 mW/cm2
mW/cm2
or 1 mW/cm2
or 1
mW/cm2
mW/cm2
Gain of antenna in dBi = 10*log(G).The regulations require that the power used for the calculations is the maximum
power in the transmit burst subject to allowance for source-based time-averaging. If there are no EIRP limits in the
country of deployment, use the distance calculations for FCC 5.8 GHz for all frequency bands.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-15
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Compliance with radio regulations
This section describes how the PMP 450 complies with the radio regulations that are enforced in various
countries.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Cambium could void the user’s authority to operate the
system.
Type approvals
This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means that the system
has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply. The frequency bands in which
the system operates may be ‘unlicensed’ and, in these bands, the system can be used provided it does not cause
interference. The system is not guaranteed protection against interference from other products and
installations.
Table 69 lists the radio specification type approvals that have been granted for PMP 450 frequency variants.
Table 69 Radio certifications
Variant
Region
Specification (Type Approvals)
2.4-GHz PMP 450
Canada
RSS Gen and RSS 210
USA
FCC Part 15 Class B
Canada
RSS Gen and RSS 192
Europe
ETSI EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2
Canada
RSS Gen and RSS 192
USA
FCC Part 15 Class B
Europe
ETSI EN 301 893 v1.6.1
USA
FCC Part 15 Class B
Canada
RSS Gen and RSS 210
USA
FCC Part 15 Class B
Europe
ETSI EN 302 502 v1.2.1
3.5-GHz PMP 450
3.6-GHz PMP 450
5.4-GHz PMP 450
5.8-GHz PMP 450
3-16
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
DFS for 5.4 GHz Radios
Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) is a requirement in several countries and regions for 5 GHz unlicensed
systems to detect radar systems and avoid co-channel operation. DFS and other regulatory requirements drive
the settings for the following parameters, as discussed in this section:
•
Country Code
•
Primary Frequency
•
Alternate 1 and Alternate 2 Frequencies
•
External Antenna Gain
On the AP, the Home => DFS Status” page shows current DFS status of all three frequencies and a DFS log of
past DFS events.
Figure 33 AP DFS Status
Background and Operation
The modules use region-specific DFS based on the Country Code selected on the module’s Configuration,
General page. By directing installers and technicians to set the Country Code correctly, the operator gains
confidence the module is operating according to national or regional regulations without having to deal with
the details for each region.
Some regions have requirements to avoid certain 5.4-GHz frequencies used by some weather radar. To meet
this requirement, modules set to Europe will display the certain channel frequencies shown in page 3-21 on the
AP’s Carrier Frequency pop-up and on the SM’s Frequency Scan Selection List.
Table 70 on page 3-19 shows the details of DFS operation and channels available for each Country Code,
including whether DFS is active on the AP, SM, which DFS regulation apply, and any channel restrictions.
DFS does not apply to 4.9 GHz.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-17
PMP 450 Planning Guide
3-18
Glossary
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Table 70 OFDM DFS operation based on Country Code setting
Region
Asia
Oceania
Europe
South
America
Country
Band
AP
SM
Vietnam
5.4-GHz
ETSI EN 301 893
v1.6.1 DFS
ETSI EN 301 893
v1.6.1 DFS
India,
Vietnam,
Indonesia
Australia
Denmark,
Finland,
Germany,
Greece,
Iceland,
Ireland,
Liechtenstein,
Norway,
Portugal,
Serbia, Spain,
Switzerland,
United
Kingdom
Brazil
Canada
North
America
United States
Other-
Other-FCC
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
Weather
Radar
NotchOut
No
5.8-GHz
No effect
No effect
5.4-GHz
FCC DFS
No effect
Yes
5.8-GHz
No effect
No effect
No
5.4-GHz
ETSI EN 301 893
v1.6.1 DFS
ETSI EN 301 893
v1.6.1 DFS
Yes
5.8-GHz
ETSI EN 302 502
v1.2.1 DFS
ETSI EN 302 502
v1.2.1 DFS
No
5.4-GHz
ETSI EN 301 893
v1.6.1 DFS
No effect
No
5.8-GHz
No effect
No effect
No
2.4-GHz
No effect
No effect
No
5.4-GHz
FCC/IC DFS
No effect
Yes
5.8-GHz
No effect
No effect
No
2.4GHz
No effect
No effect
No
5.4-GHz
FCC DFS
No effect
Yes
5.8-GHz
No effect
No effect
No
2.4-GHz
No effect
No effect
No
3-19
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Region
Country
Regulatory
Glossary
Band
AP
SM
5.4-GHz
FCC DFS
FCC DFS
5.8-GHz
No effect
No effect
5.4-GHz
ETSI EN 301 893
v1.6.1 DFS
ETSI EN 301 893
v1.6.1 DFS
No
5.8-GHz
ETSI EN 302 502
v1.2.1 DFS
ETSI EN 302 502
v1.2.1 DFS
No
Other-ETSI
Weather
Radar
NotchOut
Country Codes and available spectrum
The following tables list the Country Codes available on PMP 450 AP and SM units. Country Code settings
affect the radios in the following ways:
•
Maximum transmit power limiting (based on radio transmitter power plus configured antenna gain)
•
DFS operation is enabled based on the configured region code, if applicable
PMP 450 equipment shipped to the United States is locked to a Country Code setting of “United States”.
Units shipped to regions other than the United States must be configured with the corresponding Country Code
to comply with local regulatory requirements.
3-20
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Table 71 Center channel details based on Country Code, 2.4 GHz
OFDM
Radio
Model
Country
PMP
450
Series
AP, 2.4GHz
PMP
450
Series
SM, 2.4GHz,
internal
Patch
Antenna
United
States,
Canada,
OtherFCC
PMP
450
Series
SM, 2.4GHz,
Dish
Antenna
Channel
Size
Band
Edges
(MHz)
Range of
Center
Frequencies
Available
(MHz) ‡‡‡‡‡‡
Center
Channel
Spacing
# of
Center
Channels
(based
on PMP
450
available
range)
# of Nonoverlapping
center
channels
(based on
PMP 450
available
range)
5 MHz
2402.5 – 2475
30
15
10 MHz
2405 – 2470
27
20 MHz
2417.5– 2460
18
5 MHz
2402.5 – 2475
30
15
10 MHz
2405 – 2470
27
24002483.5
2.5 MHz
20 MHz
2417.5– 2460
18
5 MHz
2407.5 – 2465
24
12
10 MHz
2420 – 2450
13
20 MHz
2430 – 2445
For each edge frequency, transmit power must be reduced by 3 dB.
Table 72 AP Default combined transmits power per Country Code and Lower/Upper Band Edge
Path Max TX Detail, 2.4 GHz.
Country
Ant.
Comb. TX
AP
Comb. TX
AP
Comb.
AP
Device
Gain
Default
EIRP
Default
EIRP
TX
EIRP
Country
(dBi)
Setting
Limit
Setting
Limit
Default
Limit
Code
(18 dBi
‡‡‡‡‡‡
Setting
Setting
For each edge frequency, transmit power must be reduced by 3 dB.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-21
PMP 450 Planning Guide
– 1dB
cable
loss)
Glossary
5 MHz Channel
10 MHz Channel
20 MHz Channel
Bandwidth (dBm)
Bandwidth (dBm)
Bandwidth
(dBm)
Canada
17
19
United
17
19
36
36
19
19
36
19
36
Canada
36
19
36
United States
States
Lower Band Edge Frequency Path A Max TX
(MHz)
Power
Path B Max TX
Power
5 MHz
2402.5
16
16
10 MHz
2405
15
14
20 MHz
2417.5
15
15
5 MHz
2402.5
15
15
10 MHz
2405
15
15
20 MHz
2417.5
18
18
AP
SM
Upper Band Edge Frequency Path A Max TX
(MHz)
Power
Path B Max TX
Power
5 MHz
2475
16
16
10 MHz
2470
15
14
20 MHz
2460
15
15
5 MHz
2475
15
15
10 MHz
2470
15
15
20 MHz
2460
18
18
AP
SM
Table 73 Center channel details based on Country Code, 3.5 GHz
Region Code
3-22
Channel
Band Edges
Range of Center
Center
# of Center
# of Non-
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Size
Level 1
Glossary
(MHz)
Level 2
Frequencies
Channel
Channels (based
overlapping center
Available (MHz)
Spacing
on PMP 450
channels (based on
available range)
PMP 450 available
range)
Other-ETSI (Any
country that
Other
follows ETSI
rules)
India
Asia
Indonesia
China
Oceania
Australia
5 MHz
10 MHz
3402.5 – 3597.5
3400 – 3600
5 MHz
3302.5 – 3597.5
5900
59
5800
29
10 MHz
3300 – 3600
5600
14
5 MHz
3302.5 – 3397.5
1900
19
1800
10 MHz
3300 – 3400
§§§§§§
3305 - 3395
50 kHz
20 MHz
3310 - 3390
1600
5 MHz
3302.5 – 3397.5
1900
19
1800
10 MHz
3300 – 3400
3305 - 3395
50 kHz
20 MHz
3310 - 3390
1600
5 MHz
3302.5 – 3597.5
5900
59
5800
29
3310 - 3590
5600
14
3452.5 – 3647.5
3900
39
3800
19
3600
5900
59
5800
29
5600
14
3900
39
3800
19
10 MHz
10 MHz
10 MHz
3300 – 3600
3450 3650 §§§§§§
(3475-3650
for new
deployments)
3305 - 3595
3455 – 3645
50 kHz
3460 – 3640
3300 – 3600
3305 - 3595
50 kHz
3310 - 3590
3402.5 – 3597.5
3400 - 3600
10 MHz
50 kHz
3302.5 – 3597.5
5 MHz
(Denmark,
Finland, France,
50 kHz
3310 - 3590
20 MHz
Europe
3305 - 3595
20 MHz
5 MHz
Europe
19
3600
20 MHz
Mexico
3800
3410 - 3590
5 MHz
North America
50 kHz
39
20 MHz
20 MHz
Canada
3405 - 3595
3900
50 kHz
3405 - 3595
System Release 13.0 allows an upper limit of 3600MHz. Range may be extended in a future release.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-23
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Region Code
Level 1
Level 2
Channel
Band Edges
Size
(MHz)
Range of Center
Center
Frequencies
Channel
Available (MHz)
Spacing
# of Center
Channels (based
on PMP 450
available range)
# of Nonoverlapping center
channels (based on
PMP 450 available
range)
Germany,
Greece, Iceland,
Ireland, Italy,
Liechtenstein,
Norway,
20 MHz
3410 - 3590
3600
Portugal, Serbia,
Spain,
Switzerland,
United Kingdom)
3-24
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Device Country
Limit
AP EIRP
Default
TX
Combined
Limit
AP EIRP
Default
TX
Combined
Limit
AP EIRP
Gain (dBi)
Default
Antenna
TX
Country
Combined
Table 74 AP default combined transmit power per Country Code – 3.5 GHz band.
5 MHz Channel
10 MHz Channel
20 MHz Channel
Bandwidth (dBm)
Bandwidth (dBm)
Bandwidth (dBm)
Code Setting
(Level 2)
Australia
17
23
57
23
60
23
63
Australia
Canada
17
23
62
23
62
23
62
Canada
China
17
23
N/A
23
N/A
23
N/A
China
Denmark
17
23
60
23
63
23
66
Denmark
Finland
17
23
60
23
63
23
66
Finland
France
17
23
60
23
63
23
66
France
Germany
17
23
60
23
63
23
66
Germany
Greece
17
23
60
23
63
23
66
Greece
India
17
23
N/A
23
N/A
23
N/A
India
Iceland
17
23
60
23
63
23
66
Iceland
Indonesia
17
23
N/A
23
N/A
23
N/A
Indonesia
Ireland
17
23
60
23
63
23
66
Ireland
Italy
17
23
60
23
63
23
66
Italy
Liechtenstein
17
23
60
23
63
23
66
Liechtenstein
Mexico
17
23
N/A
23
N/A
23
N/A
Mexico
Norway
17
23
60
23
63
23
66
Norway
Portugal
17
23
60
23
63
23
66
Portugal
Serbia
17
23
60
23
63
23
66
Serbia
Spain
17
23
60
23
63
23
66
Spain
Switzerland
17
23
60
23
63
23
66
Switzerland
United
Kingdom
17
23
60
23
63
23
66
United Kingdom
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-25
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Table 75 Center channel details based on Country Code, 3.6 GHz
Region Code
Channel Size
Level 1
Level 2
Band Edges
(MHz)
5 MHz
Other
Other - ETSI (Any
country that
Other
follows ETSI rules)
Other – FCC
India
10 MHz
Range of Center
Center
Frequencies
Channel
Available (MHz)
Spacing
3552.5 – 3797.5
3550 – 3800
3555 – 3795
50 kHz
# of Center
# of Non-overlapping
Channels (based on
center channels
PMP 450 available
(based on PMP 450
range)
available range)
4900
48
4800
23
20 MHz
3560 – 3790
4600
10.5
5 MHz
3552.5 – 3797.5
4900
48
4800
23
10 MHz
3550 – 3800
3555 – 3795
50 kHz
20 MHz
3560 – 3790
4600
10.5
5 MHz
3652.5 – 3697.5
2900
28
2800
13
10 MHz
3650 – 3700
3655 – 3695
50 kHz
20 MHz
3660 – 3690
2600
5.5
5 MHz
3552.5 – 3797.5
4900
48
4800
23
10 MHz
3550 – 3800
3555 – 3795
50 kHz
20 MHz
3560 – 3790
4600
10.5
5 MHz
3602.5 – 3797.5
3900
38
3800
18
Asia
Indonesia
Oceania
Australia
Canada
10 MHz
3600 – 3800
3605 – 3795
50 kHz
20 MHz
3610 – 3790
3600
5 MHz
3552.5 – 3797.5
4900
48
4800
23
10 MHz
3550 – 3800
3555 – 3795
50 kHz
20 MHz
3560 – 3790
4600
10.5
5 MHz
3552.5 – 3697.5
2900
28
2800
13
10 MHz
3550 – 3700
3555 – 3695
50 kHz
20 MHz
3560 – 3690
2600
5.5
5 MHz
3552.5 – 3747.5
3900
38
3800
18
3600
900
800
North America
Mexico
10 MHz
3550 – 3750
20 MHz
3-26
3652.5 – 3697.5
3650 – 3700
10 MHz
50 kHz
3560 – 3740
5 MHz
United States
3555 – 3745
50 kHz
3655 – 3695
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Region Code
Channel Size
Level 1
Level 2
Europe (Denmark,
Finland, France,
Band Edges
(MHz)
Range of Center
Center
Frequencies
Channel
Available (MHz)
Spacing
# of Center
# of Non-overlapping
Channels (based on
center channels
PMP 450 available
(based on PMP 450
range)
available range)
20 MHz
3660 – 3690
600
0.5
5 MHz
3552.5 – 3797.5
4900
48
4800
23
4600
10.5
Germany, Greece,
Iceland, Ireland,
Europe
Italy, Liechtenstein,
10 MHz
3550 – 3800
3555 – 3795
50 kHz
Norway, Portugal,
Serbia, Spain,
Switzerland,
20 MHz
3560 – 3790
United Kingdom)
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-27
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Australia
Device Country
Limit
AP EIRP
Default
TX
Combined
Limit
AP EIRP
Default
TX
Combined
Limit
AP EIRP
Gain (dBi)
Default
Antenna
TX
Country
Combined
Table 76 AP default combined transmit power per Country Code – 3.6 GHz band
5 MHz Channel
10 MHz Channel
20 MHz Channel
Bandwidth (dBm)
Bandwidth (dBm)
Bandwidth (dBm)
Code Setting
(Level 2)
17
25
N/A
25
N/A
25
N/A
Australia
17
25
62
25
62
25
62
Canada
17
19
37
22
40
25
43
Canada
Denmark
17
25
60
25
63
25
66
Denmark
Finland
17
25
60
25
63
25
66
Finland
France
17
25
60
25
63
25
66
France
Germany
17
25
60
25
63
25
66
Germany
Greece
17
25
60
25
63
25
66
Greece
India
17
25
N/A
25
N/A
25
N/A
India
Indonesia
17
25
N/A
25
N/A
25
N/A
Indonesia
Ireland
17
25
60
25
63
25
66
Ireland
Italy
17
25
60
25
63
25
66
Italy
Liechtenstein
17
25
60
25
63
25
66
Liechtenstein
Mexico
17
25
N/A
25
N/A
25
N/A
Mexico
Norway
17
25
60
25
63
25
66
Norway
Portugal
17
25
60
25
63
25
66
Portugal
Serbia
17
25
60
25
63
25
66
Serbia
Spain
17
25
60
25
63
25
66
Spain
Switzerland
17
25
60
25
63
25
66
Switzerland
United Kingdom
17
25
60
25
63
25
66
United Kingdom
United States
17
19
37
22
40
25
43
United States
Canada
(3550 – 3650)
Canada
(3650 – 3700)
3-28
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Table 77 Center channel details based on Country Code, 5.4 GHz
OFDM
Radio
Model
Country
Code
Brazil
PMP
450
Series
AP, 5.4GHz
Australia,
Denmark,
Finland,
Germany,
Greece,
Iceland,
Ireland,
Liechtenstein,
Norway,
Portugal,
Serbia, Spain,
Switzerland,
United
Kingdom
United
States,
Canada
Other
*******
Channel
Size
Band
Edges
(MHz)
Range of
Center
Frequencies
Available
(MHz)
10 MHz
5470 –
5725
5475 – 5720
99
25
5480 – 5715
95
12
5475 – 5595;
5655 5720 *******
77
20
67
5475 – 5595;
5655 - 5720
77
20
5480 – 5590;
5660 – 5715
69
5475 - 5720
99
25
5480 – 5715
95
12
20 MHz
10 MHz
20 MHz
10 MHz
20 MHz
10 MHz
20 MHz
5470 –
5600;
5650 5725
5470 –
5600;
5650 –
5725
5470 –
5725
5480 – 5590;
5660 –
5710*******
Center
Channel
Spacing
2.5 MHz
# of
Center
Channels
(based on
PMP 450
available
range,
weather
notch-out)
# of Nonoverlapping
center
channels
(based on
PMP 450
available
range)
Frequencies 5600 – 5650 MHz are excluded, as ten minute Channel Availability Check is required
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-29
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Table 78 Center channel details based on Country Code, 5.8 GHz
OFDM
Radio
Model
Country
Channel
Size
Denmark,
Norway, United
Kingdom,
Finland
10 MHz
Germany
Switzerland,
Liechtenstein
Canada, United
States
3-30
10
5760 – 5870
45
12
5765 – 5865
41
5730- 5790;
5820 – 5850
39
5735 – 5785;
5825 – 5845
31
5730 – 5790
25
5735 – 5785
21
57
15
5735 – 5865
53
5730 – 5790;
5820 – 5870
47
5735 – 5785;
5825 – 5865
39
5727.5 – 5847.5
49
25
5730 – 5845
47
12
20 MHz
5735 – 5840
43
5 MHz
5730 - 5845
10 MHz
20 MHz
10 MHz
20 MHz
10 MHz
20 MHz
10 MHz
20 MHz
5755 – 5875;
5725 – 5795;
5815 – 5855
5725 – 5795
5725 – 5875
5725 – 5795;
5815 – 5875
10 MHz
10 MHz
5725 - 5850
5725 - 5850
20 MHz
India
# of Nonoverlapping
center
channels
(based on
PMP 450
available
range)
29
5725 – 5795;
5815 – 5850
5 MHz
Australia
# of
Center
Channels
(based on
PMP 450
available
range,
weather
notch-out)
5735 – 5785;
5825 – 5840
20 MHz
20 MHz
Portugal,
Iceland, Serbia
Center
Channel
Spacing
37
Spain
PMP 450
Series AP,
5.8-GHz
Range of
Center
Frequencies
Available
(MHz)
5730 – 5790;
5820 – 5845
10 MHz
Greece
Band
Edges
(MHz)
5 MHz
5825 – 5875
5730 – 5870
5730 – 5845
2.5 MHz
47
10
12
24
12
5735 – 5845
45
5827.5 – 5872.5
19
10
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Brazil, Vietnam
Indonesia
Glossary
10 MHz
5830 - 5870
17
20 MHz
5835 - 5865
13
5 MHz
5727.5 – 5847.5
49
25
5730 – 5845
47
12
20 MHz
5735 - 5840
43
5 MHz
5727.5 – 5822.5
39
20
5730 – 5820
37
10
5735 - 5815
33
10 MHz
5725 – 5850
10 MHz
5725 - 5825
20 MHz
Table 79 Default combined transmit power per Country Code – 5.4 GHz band
Antenna
Gain (dBi)
Country
(18 dBi –
1dB cable
loss)
Combined
TX Default
Setting
AP EIRP
Limit
10 MHz Channel
Bandwidth (dBm)
Combined
TX Default
Setting
AP EIRP
Limit
20 MHz Channel
Bandwidth (dBm)
Device
Country Code
Setting
United States,
Canada
17
10
27
13
30
United States,
Canada
Brazil
17
10
27
13
30
Brazil
Australia
17
10
27
13
30
Australia
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-31
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Antenna
Gain (dBi)
Country
(18 dBi –
1dB cable
loss)
Austria,
Belgium, Bosnia
& Herzegovina,
Bulgaria,
Croatia, Cyprus,
Czech Republic,
France, ,
Hungary,
Ireland, Italy,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Luxembourg,
Macedonia,
Malta,
Netherlands,
Poland,
Romania,
Slovakia,
Glossary
Combined
TX Default
Setting
AP EIRP
Limit
10 MHz Channel
Bandwidth (dBm)
Combined
TX Default
Setting
AP EIRP
Limit
20 MHz Channel
Bandwidth (dBm)
Device
Country Code
Setting
17
10
27 †††††††
13
30
Other-ETSI
Denmark
17
10
27
13
30
Denmark
Finland
17
10
27
13
30
Finland
Germany
17
10
27
13
30
Germany
Greece
17
10
27
13
30
Greece
Liechtenstein
17
10
27
13
30
Liechtenstein
Norway
17
10
27
13
30
Norway
Portugal
17
10
27
13
30
Portugal
Spain
17
10
27
13
30
Spain
United Kingdom
17
10
27
13
30
United Kingdom
Slovenia ,
Sweden
At 5.4 GHz, EU regulations are harmonized. 5600 – 5650 MHz excluded, as ten minute Channel Availability
Check (CAC) is required
†††††††
3-32
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Antenna
Gain (dBi)
Country
(18 dBi –
Glossary
Combined
TX Default
Setting
Combined
TX Default
Setting
10 MHz Channel
Bandwidth (dBm)
1dB cable
loss)
Other
AP EIRP
Limit
17
20 MHz Channel
Bandwidth (dBm)
No EIRP /
Conducted
power limit
19
AP EIRP
Limit
Device
Country Code
Setting
No EIRP /
Conducted
power limit
19
Other
(18 dBi –
1dB cable
loss)
5 MHz Channel
Bandwidth
(dBm)
10 MHz Channel
Bandwidth (dBm)
Limit
AP EIRP
Setting
Default
TX
Combined
Limit
AP EIRP
Setting
Default
TX
Combined
Limit
AP EIRP
Default
Antenna
Gain
(dBi)
TX
Country
Code
Combined
Table 80 Default combined transmit power per Country Code – 5.8 GHz band
Device
Country
Code
Setting
20 MHz Channel
Bandwidth (dBm)
Australia
17
19
36
19
36
19
36
Australia
Brazil
17
24
10
27
13
30
Brazil
Canada
17
26
19
36
19
36
Canada
Denmark
17
16
33
19
36
Denmark
Finland
17
16
33
19
36
Finland
Germany
17
16
33
19
36
Germany
Greece
17
16
33
19
36
Greece
India
17
19
36
19
36
India
Iceland
17
16
33
19
36
Iceland
Indonesia
17
19
36
19
36
Indonesia
Ireland
17
13
30
16
33
Ireland
Liechtenstein
17
16
33
19
36
Liechtenstein
Norway
17
16
33
19
36
Norway
Portugal
17
16
33
19
36
Portugal
Serbia
17
16
33
19
36
Serbia
Spain
17
16
33
19
36
Spain
Switzerland
17
16
33
19
36
Switzerland
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
19
13
36
30
3-33
(18 dBi –
1dB cable
loss)
United
Kingdom
17
United States
17
Vietnam
17
5 MHz Channel
Bandwidth
(dBm)
19
36
24
10 MHz Channel
Bandwidth (dBm)
Limit
AP EIRP
Setting
Default
TX
Combined
Limit
AP EIRP
Setting
Default
TX
Combined
Limit
AP EIRP
Default
Antenna
Gain
(dBi)
TX
Country
Code
Glossary
Combined
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Device
Country
Code
Setting
20 MHz Channel
Bandwidth (dBm)
16
33
19
36
United
Kingdom
19
36
19
36
United States
27
13
30
Vietnam
10
After an AP with DFS is powered on it performs a channel availability check on its main carrier frequency for
1 minute, monitoring for the radar signature without transmitting. If no radar signature is detected during this
minute, the module then proceeds to normal beacon transmit mode. If it does detect a radar signature, the
frequency is marked for a 30 minute non-occupancy period, and the module moves to its 1st alternate carrier
frequency. The AP continues this behavior through its 2nd alternate frequency if needed and then waits until
the first frequency ends the 30 minute non-occupancy period. While operating, if the AP detects a weather
radar signature it marks the current carrier frequency for a 30 minute non-occupancy period and moves to
check the next-in-line carrier frequency.
An SM does not begin transmission until it detects a beacon from an AP. If APs are not transmitting, SMs will
be silent.
Europe applies the ETSI specification to both APs and SMs, while Brazil applies it only to APs. In the ETSI
case, when an SM is powered on, it scans to find a Canopy beacon from a AP. If an AP is found, the SM
performs a channel availability check on that frequency for 1 minute, monitoring for the radar signature,
without transmitting. A DFS decision is made based on the following:
•
If no radar pulse is detected during this 1 minute, the SM proceeds through normal steps to register to an
AP.
•
If the SM does detect radar, it locks out that frequency for 30 minutes and continues scanning other
frequencies in its scan list.
After an SM with DFS has seen a radar signature on a frequency and locked out that frequency, it may connect
to a different AP if color codes, AP transmitting frequencies, and SM scanned frequencies support that
connection.
3-34
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
To simplify operation and ensure compliance, an SM takes on the DFS type of the AP to which it registers. For
example, when an SM in Europe registers to an AP with the Country Code set to “United Kingdom”, that SM
will use ETSI DFS, no matter what its Country Code is set to, even if its Country Code is set to “None”. Note,
the operator should still configure the Country Code in the SM correctly, as future releases may use the
Country Code for additional region-specific options.
For all modules running DFS, the module displays its DFS state on its Home => General Status page as one of
the following:
•
Checking Channel Availability Remaining time n seconds, where n counts down from 60
•
Normal Transmit
•
Radar Detected Stop Transmitting for n minutes, where n counts down from 30 to 1.
to 1.
•
Idle, only for SM/BHS, indicates module is scanning, but has not detected a beacon from an AP/BHM. Once it
detects beacon, the SM/BHS begins a Channel Availability Check on that frequency.
Regulatory Note: A PMP 450 Series AP with a Country Code set to United States will not be configurable to
another Country Code by installers or end users. This is in response to FCC KDB 594280 and ensures that end
users and professional installers will not have access to settings which could allow a radio to be configured to
operate in a manner other than that which was specified in the FCC equipment authorization grant.
Within the United States and its territories the PMP 450 Country Code is pre-configured to United States and
not selectable in the Configuration, General web page. Radios sold in regions outside of the United States and
its territories are required to set the Country Code to the region in which it is used.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-35
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
FCC compliance testing
With GPS synchronization installed, the system has been tested for compliance to US (FCC) specifications. It
has been shown to comply with the limits for emitted spurious radiation for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules in the USA. These limits have been designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference. However the equipment can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to other radio communications.
There is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
A Class B Digital Device is a device that is marketed for use in a residential environment, notwithstanding
use in commercial, business and industrial environments.
Notwithstanding that Cambium has designed (and qualified) the PMP 450 products to generally meet the
Class B requirement to minimize the potential for interference, the PMP 450 product range is not marketed
for use in a residential environment.
FCC and ICC IDs and certification numbers
Table 81 US FCC IDs and Industry Canada Certification Numbers and Covered Configurations
FCC ID
Industry
Canada
Cert
Number
Module
Families
Frequencies
Antenna
(OFDM)
Maximum
Combined
Tx Output
Power
20 MHz channels, centered on 2417.5 –
2460 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the
2400 – 2483.5 MHz ISM band)
Z8H89FT0004
109W-0004
10 MHz channels, centered on 2405 –
PMP 450
2470 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the
AP 2.4-GHz
2400 – 2483.5 MHz ISM band)
17 dBi
Connectorized
19 dBm
5 MHz channels, centered on 2402.5 –
2475 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the
2400 – 2483.5 MHz ISM band)
3-36
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
FCC ID
Industry
Canada
Cert
Number
Module
Families
Glossary
Frequencies
Antenna
(OFDM)
Maximum
Combined
Tx Output
Power
20 MHz channels, centered on 3460 –
3640 in 50 kHz increments (within the
3300 – 3600 MHz ISM band)
109W-0008
PMP 450
AP 3.5-GHz
10 MHz channels, centered on 3455 –
3645 in 50 kHz increments (within the
3300 – 3600 MHz ISM band)
17 dBi
Connectorized
25 dBm
5 MHz channels, centered on 3452.5 3647.5 in 50 kHz increments (within the
3300 – 3600 MHz ISM band)
20 MHz channels, centered on 3660 –
3690 in 50 kHz increments (within the
3550 – 3800 MHz ISM band)
Z8H89FT0010
109W-0010
PMP 450
AP 3.6-GHz
10 MHz channels, centered on 3655 –
3695 in 50 kHz increments (within the
3550 – 3800 MHz ISM band)
25 dBm
17 dBi
Connectorized
5 MHz channels, centered on 3652.5 3697.5 in 50 kHz increments (within the
3550 – 3800 MHz ISM band)
Z8H89FT0002
109W-0002
20 MHz channels, centered on 5735PMP 450
5840 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the
AP 5.8-GHz
5725-5850 MHz ISM band)
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
22 dBm
19 dBm
17 dBi
Connectorized
19 dBm
3-37
PMP 450 Planning Guide
FCC ID
Industry
Canada
Cert
Number
Module
Families
Glossary
Frequencies
Antenna
(OFDM)
Maximum
Combined
Tx Output
Power
10 MHz channels, centered on 57305845 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the
5725-5850 MHz ISM band)
5 MHz channels, centered on 5725-5850
in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 57255850 MHz ISM band)
20 MHz channels, centered on 5480 –
5590; 5660 – 5715 in 2.5 MHz
increments (within the 5470 – 5600;
5650 – 5725 MHz UNII band)
Z8H89FT0002
109W-0002
PMP 450
AP 5.4-GHz
13 dBm
17 dBi
Connectorized
10 MHz channels, centered on 5475 –
5595; 5655 – 5720 in 2.5 MHz
increments (within the 5470 – 5600;
5650 – 5725 MHz UNII band)
7 dBi Integrated
19 dBm
7 dBi Integrated
with 12 dBi
Reflector Dish
17 dBm
7 dBi Integrated
19 dBm
7 dBi Integrated
with 12 dBi
Reflector Dish
17 dBm
7 dBi Integrated
19 dBm
7 dBi Integrated
with 12 dBi
Reflector Dish
17 dBm
20 MHz channels, centered on 3460 –
3640 in 50 kHz increments (within the
3300 – 3600 MHz ISM band)
8 dBi Integrated
25 dBm
8 dBi Integrated
with 11 dBi
Reflector Dish
25 dBm
10 MHz channels, centered on 3455 –
8 dBi Integrated
25 dBm
20 MHz channels, centered on 2417.5 –
2460 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the
2400 – 2483.5 MHz ISM band)
Z8H89
FT0003
109W-0003
10 MHz channels, centered on 2405 –
PMP 450 2470 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the
SM 2.4-GHz
2400 – 2483.5 MHz ISM band)
5 MHz channels, centered on 2402.5 –
2475 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the
2400 – 2483.5 MHz ISM band)
109W-0007
3-38
PMP 450
SM 3.5-GHz
10 dBm
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
FCC ID
Industry
Canada
Cert
Number
Module
Families
Glossary
Frequencies
3645 in 50 kHz increments (within the
3300 – 3600 MHz ISM band)
5 MHz channels, centered on 3452.5 3647.5 in 50 kHz increments (within the
3300 – 3600 MHz ISM band)
20 MHz channels, centered on 3560 –
3690 in 50 kHz increments (within the
3550 – 3800 MHz ISM band)
Z8H89FT0009
109W-0009
PMP 450
SM 3.6-GHz
10 MHz channels, centered on 3555 –
3695 in 50 kHz increments (within the
3550 – 3800 MHz ISM band)
5 MHz channels, centered on 3552.5 3697.5 in 50 kHz increments (within the
3550 – 3800 MHz ISM band)
Antenna
(OFDM)
Maximum
Combined
Tx Output
Power
8 dBi Integrated
with 11 dBi
Reflector Dish
25 dBm
8 dBi Integrated
25 dBm
8 dBi Integrated
with 11 dBi
Reflector Dish
25 dBm
8 dBi Integrated
25 dBm
8 dBi Integrated
with 11 dBi
Reflector Dish
25 dBm
8 dBi Integrated
22 dBm
8 dBi Integrated
with 11 dBi
Reflector Dish
22 dBm
8 dBi Integrated
19 dBm
8 dBi Integrated
with 11 dBi
Reflector Dish
19 dBm
9 dBi Integrated
20 MHz channels, centered on 57355840 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the
5725-5850 MHz ISM band)
Z8H89FT0001
109W-0001
PMP 450
SM 5.8-GHz
9 dBi Integrated
with 5.5 dBi
LENS
19 dBm
9 dBi Integrated
with 8 dBi CLIP
10 MHz channels, centered on 57305845 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the
5725-5850 MHz ISM band)
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
9 dBi Integrated
with 14 dBi
Reflector Dish
9 dBi Integrated
9 dBi Integrated
with 14 dBi
Reflector Dish
19 dBm
3-39
PMP 450 Planning Guide
FCC ID
Industry
Canada
Cert
Number
Module
Families
Glossary
Frequencies
Antenna
(OFDM)
Maximum
Combined
Tx Output
Power
9 dBi Integrated
with 5.5 dBi
LENS
9 dBi Integrated
with 8 dBi CLIP
9 dBi Integrated
5 MHz channels, centered on 5725-5845
in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 57255850 MHz ISM band)
9 dBi Integrated
with 14 dBi
Reflector Dish
9 dBi Integrated
with 5.5 dBi
LENS
19 dBm
9 dBi Integrated
with 8 dBi CLIP
20 MHz channels, centered on 5480 –
5590; 5660 – 5715 in 2.5 MHz
increments (within the 5470 – 5600;
5650 – 5725 MHz UNII band)
Z8H89FT0001
109W-0001
PMP 450
SM 5.4-GHz
10 MHz channels, centered on 5475 –
5595; 5655 – 5720 in 2.5 MHz
increments (within the 5470 – 5600;
5650 – 5725 MHz UNII band)
3-40
9 dBi Integrated
11 dBm
9 dBi Integrated
with 14 dBi
Reflector Dish
7 dBm
9 dBi Integrated
with 5.5 dBi LENS
15 dBm
9 dBi Integrated
with 8 dBi CLIP
13 dBm
9 dBi Integrated
10 dBm
9 dBi Integrated
with 14 dBi
Reflector Dish
4 dBm
9 dBi Integrated
with 5.5 dBi LENS
12 dBm
9 dBi Integrated
with 8 dBi CLIP
10 dBm
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-41
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Notifications
This section contains notifications of compliance with the radio regulations that are enforced in various regions.
PMP 450 regulatory compliance
The PMP 450 complies with the regulations that are enforced in the USA and Canada. The relevant
notifications are specified in this section.
PMP 450 FCC and IC notification
U.S. Federal Communication Commission (FCC) and Industry Canada (IC) Notification.
This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means that the system
has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply. The frequency band in which
the system operates is ‘license exempt’ and the system is allowed to be used provided it does not cause
interference. The licensing authority does not guarantee protection against interference from other products
and installations.
This device complies with part 15 of the US FCC Rules and Regulations and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation. In Canada, users should be cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary
users (meaning they have priority) of the 5650 – 5850 MHz spectrum and these radars could cause interference
and/or damage to license-exempt local area networks (LELAN).
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and
maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio
interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically
radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une
antenne d'un type et d'un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour l'émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le
but de réduire les risques de brouillage radioélectrique à l'intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type
d'antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (PIRE) ne dépasse pas l'intensité
nécessaire à l'établissement d'une communication satisfaisante.
3-42
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the US FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with these instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment on and off, the user is
encouraged to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
Increase the separation between the affected equipment and the unit;
•
Connect the affected equipment to a power outlet on a different circuit from that which the receiver is
connected to;
•
Consult the dealer and/or experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Where necessary, the end user is responsible for obtaining any National licenses required to operate this
product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular country. Contact the
appropriate national administrations for details on the conditions of use for the bands in question and any
exceptions that might apply.
This radio transmitter (identify the device by certification number, or model number if Category II) has been
approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible
gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list,
having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this
device.
Le présent émetteur radio (identifier le dispositif par son numéro de certification ou son numéro de modèle s'il
fait partie du matériel de catégorie I) a été approuvé par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types
d'antenne énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal et l'impédance requise pour chaque type
d'antenne. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal
indiqué, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'émetteur.
Table 82 Industry Canada approved antenna list
Approved Antenna Model
Description
Input Impedance
C024045D601A
2.4 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 60
Degree Sector
50 Ω
C030045D901A
3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz Dual Slant
Antenna for 90 Degree Sector
50 Ω
MA-WA36-DP21N
3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz Dual Slant
Antenna for 12 Degree Panel
50 Ω
85009324001
5 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 90
Degree Sector
50 Ω
85009325001
5 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 60
Degree Sector
50 Ω
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-43
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Equipment Disposal
Waste (Disposal)
of Electronic
and Electric
Equipment
Please do not dispose of Electronic and Electric Equipment or
Electronic and Electric Accessories with your household waste.
In some countries or regions, collection systems have been set up
to handle waste of electrical and electronic equipment. In
European Union countries, please contact your local equipment
supplier representative or service center for information about
the waste collection system in your country.
European Union Notification for 5.4 and 5.8 GHz Product
The 5.4 and 5.8 GHz connectorized product is a two-way radio transceiver suitable for use in Broadband
Wireless Access System (WAS), Radio Local Area Network (RLAN), or Fixed Wireless Access (FWA) systems.
It is a Class 2 device and uses operating frequencies that are not harmonized throughout the EU member
states. The operator is responsible for obtaining any national licenses required to operate this product and these
must be obtained before using the product in any particular country.
Hereby, Cambium declares that the 5.4 and 5.8 GHz product complies with the essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. The relevant Declaration of Conformity can be found at
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/ec-doc.
This equipment is marked
1999/5/EC.
to show compliance with the European R&TTE directive
Regulatory Requirements for CEPT Member States
(www.cept.org)
When operated in accordance with the instructions for use, Cambium Wireless equipment operating in the 5.4
GHz bands is compliant with CEPT Recommendation 70-03 Annex 3 for Wideband Data Transmission and
HIPERLANs. For compliant operation in the 5.4 GHz band, the transmit power (EIRP) from the integrated
antenna or a connectorized antenna shall be no more than 0.5 W (27 dBm).
For EU member states, RLAN equipment in the 5.4GHz bands is exempt from individual licensing under
Commission Recommendation 2003/203/EC. Contact the appropriate national administrations for details on
the conditions of use for the bands in question and any exceptions that might apply. Also see www.ero.dk for
further information.
10 MHz channels are used, centered on 5475 to 5595 and 5655 to 5715 in 5 MHz increments. This is within the
5470 to 5725 MHz U-NII band with 5600 to 5650 MHz excluded.
Cambium Radio equipment operating in the 5470 to 5725 MHz band are categorized as “Class 1” devices
within the EU in accordance with ECC DEC(04)08 and are “CE” marked
to show
compliance with the European Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) directive
1999/5/EC. The relevant Declaration of Conformity can be found at
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/ec_doc/.
3-44
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
A European Commission decision, implemented by Member States on 31 October 2005, makes the frequency
band 5470-5725 MHz available in all EU Member States for wireless access systems. Under this decision, the
designation of Canopy 5.4GHz products become “Class 1 devices” and these do not require notification under
article 6, section 4 of the R&TTE Directive. Consequently, these 5.4GHz products are only marked with the
symbol and may be used in any member state.
UK Notification
The 5.8 GHz connectorized product has been notified for operation in the UK, and when operated in
accordance with instructions for use it is compliant with UK Interface Requirement IR2007. For UK use,
installations must conform to the requirements of IR2007 in terms of EIRP spectral density against elevation
profile above the local horizon in order to protect Fixed Satellite Services. The frequency range 5795-5815 MHz
is assigned to Road Transport & Traffic Telematics (RTTT) in the U.K. and shall not be used by FWA systems
in order to protect RTTT devices. UK licensing specifies that radiolocation services shall be protected by a
Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) mechanism to prevent co-channel operation in the presence of radar
signals.
Brazil Notification
For compliant operation in the 5.4 GHz band, the Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power from the integrated
antenna or connectorized antenna shall not exceed 27 dBm (0.5 W).
Please note, 3.5GHz and 3.6GHz has been notified to all EU member states as of the time of the creation of this
document.
The operator is responsible for enabling the DFS feature on any Canopy 5.4 GHz radio by setting the Region
Code to “Brazil”, including after the module is reset to factory defaults.
Important Note: This equipment operates as a secondary application, so it has no rights against harmful
interference, even if generated by similar equipment, and cannot cause harmful interference on systems
operating as primary applications.
Luxembourg Notification
5.4GHz products can only be used for mobile services.
Czech Republic Notification
5.4 GHz products can be operated in accordance with the Czech General License No. GL-30/R/2000.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
3-45
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Italy Notification
In Italy, there is a regulation which requires a general authorization of any 5.4 GHz radio link which is used
outside the operator’s own premises. It is the responsibility of the installer or operator to have the link
authorized. Details may be found at:
http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/index.php?option=com_content&view=article&idmenu=672&idarea1=5
93&andor=AND&idarea2=1052&id=68433§ionid=1,16&viewType=1&showMenu=1&showCat=1&idarea3
=0&andorcat=AND&partebassaType=0&idareaCalendario1=0&MvediT=1&idarea4=0&showArchiveNewsBot
ton=0&directionidUser=0
The form to be used for general authorization may be found at:
http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/images/stories/mise_extra/Allegato%20n19.doc.
3.5GHz and 3.6GHz has been notified to all EU member states.
3-46
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Appendix A:
Glossary
Table 83 Glossary
Term
Definition
10Base-T
Technology in Ethernet communications that can deliver 10 Mb of data across 328
feet (100 meters) of CAT 5 cable.
169.254.0.0
Gateway IP address default in Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP network
modules.
169.254.1.1
IP address default in Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP network modules.
255.255.0.0
Subnet mask default in Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP network modules and
in Microsoft and Apple operating systems.
802.3
An IEEE standard that defines the contents of frames that are transferred through
Ethernet connections. Each of these frames contains a preamble, the address to
which the frame is sent, the address that sends the frame, the length of the data to
expect, the data, and a checksum to validate that no contents were lost.
802.11
The IEEE standard for wireless local area networks.
802.15
The IEEE standard for wireless personal area networks.
Access Point
Cluster
Two to six Access Point Modules that together distribute network or Internet
services to a community of subscribers. Each Access Point Module covers a 60° or
90° sector. This cluster covers as much as 360°. Also known as AP cluster.
Access Point
Module
Also known as AP. One module that distributes network or Internet services in a
60° or 90° sector.
ACT/4
Second-from-left LED in the module. In the operating mode, this LED is lit when
data activity is present on the Ethernet link.
Activate
To provide feature capability to a module, but not to enable (turn on) the feature in
the module. See also Enable.
Address Resolution
Protocol
Protocol defined in RFC 826 to allow a network element to correlate a host IP
address to the Ethernet address of the host. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc826.html.
Aggregate
Throughput
The sum of the throughputs in the uplink and the downlink.
AP
Access Point Module. One module that distributes network or Internet services to
subscriber modules.
PMP 450 Planning Guide
II
Glossary
Term
Definition
APs MIB
Management Information Base file that defines objects that are specific to the
Access Point Module. See also Management Information Base.
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol. A protocol defined in RFC 826 to allow a network
element to correlate a host IP address to the Ethernet address of the host. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc826.html.
ASN.1
Abstract Syntax Notation One language. The format of the text files that compose
the Management Information Base.
Attenuation
Reduction of signal strength caused by the travel from the transmitter to the
receiver, and caused by any object between. In the absence of objects between, a
signal that has a short wavelength experiences a high degree of attenuation
nevertheless.
BER
Bit Error Rate. The ratio of incorrect data received to correct data received.
Bit Error Rate
Ratio of incorrect data received to correct data received.
Box MIB
Management Information Base file that defines module-level objects. See also
Management Information Base.
Bridge
Network element that uses the physical address (not the logical address) of another
to pass data. The bridge passes the data to either the destination address, if found in
the simple routing table, or to all network segments other than the one that
transmitted the data. Modules are Layer 2 bridges except that, where NAT is
enabled for an SM, the SM is a Layer 3 switch. Compare to Switch and Router, and
see also NAT.
Bridge Entry
Timeout Field
Value that the operator sets as the maximum interval for no activity with another
module, whose MAC address is the Bridge Entry. This interval should be longer
than the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) cache timeout of the router that feeds
the network.
Buckets
Theoretical data repositories that can be filled at preset rates or emptied when
preset conditions are experienced, such as when data is transferred.
Burst
Preset amount limit of data that may be continuously transferred.
C/I Ratio
Ratio of intended signal (carrier) to unintended signal (interference) received.
Carrier-tointerference Ratio
Ratio of intended reception to unintended reception.
CarSenseLost Field
This field displays how many carrier sense lost errors occurred on the Ethernet
controller.
CAT 5 Cable
Cable that delivers Ethernet communications from module to module. Later
modules auto-sense whether this cable is wired in a straight-through or crossover
scheme.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Term
Definition
CIR
Committed Information Rate. For an SM or specified group of SMs, a level of
bandwidth that can be guaranteed to never fall below a specified minimum (unless
oversubscribed). In the Cambium implementation, this is controlled by the Low
Priority Uplink CIR, Low Priority Downlink CIR, High Priority Uplink CIR, and
High Priority Downlink CIR parameters.
CLIP
Cassegrain Lens for Improved Performance
Cluster
Management
Module
Module that provides power, GPS timing, and networking connections for an AP
cluster. Also known as CMM.
CMM
Cluster Management Module. A module that provides power, GPS timing, and
networking connections for an Access Point cluster.
CodePoint
See DiffServ.
Color Code Field
Module parameter that identifies the other modules with which communication is
allowed. The range of valid values is 0 to 255.
Community String
Field
Control string that allows a network management station to access MIB
information about the module.
Country Code
Unique identifier that helps distinguish the particular transmits and receives rules
for one country from another country in that same region (see Region Code).
CRCError Field
This field displays how many CRC errors occurred on the Ethernet controller.
Data Encryption
Standard
Over-the-air link option that uses secret 56-bit keys and 8 parity bits. Data
Encryption Standard (DES) performs a series of bit permutations, substitutions,
and recombination operations on blocks of data.
Demilitarized Zone
Internet Protocol area outside of a firewall. Defined in RFC 2647. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2647.html.
DES
Data Encryption Standard. An over-the-air link option that uses secret 56-bit keys
and 8 parity bits. DES performs a series of bit permutations, substitutions, and
recombination operations on blocks of data.
Desensed
Received an undesired signal that was strong enough to make the module
insensitive to the desired signal.
DFS
See Dynamic Frequency Selection
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, defined in RFC 2131. Protocol that enables
a device to be assigned a new IP address and TCP/IP parameters, including a
default gateway, whenever the device reboots. Thus DHCP reduces configuration
time, conserves IP addresses, and allows modules to be moved to a different
network within the system. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2131.html. See also
Static IP Address Assignment.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
Field Code Changed
III
PMP 450 Planning Guide
IV
Glossary
Term
Definition
DiffServ
Differentiated Services, consistent with RFC 2474. A byte in the type of service
(TOS) field of packets whose values correlates to the channel on which the packet
should be sent. The value is a numeric code point. Cambium modules map each of
64 code points to values of 0 through 7. Three of these code points have fixed
values, and the remaining 61 are settable. Values of 0 through 3 map to the lowpriority channel; 4 through 7 to the high-priority channel. The mappings are the
same as 802.1p VLAN priorities. (However, configuring DiffServ does not
automatically enable the VLAN feature.) Among the settable parameters, the
values are set in the AP for all downlinks within the sector and in the SM for each
uplink.
Disable
To turn off a feature in the module after both the feature activation file has
activated the module to use the feature and the operator has enabled the feature in
the module. See also Activate and Enable.
DMZ
Demilitarized Zone as defined in RFC 2647. An Internet Protocol area outside of a
firewall. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2647.html.
Dynamic
Frequency
Selection
A requirement in certain countries and regions for systems to detect
interference from other systems, notably radar systems, and to avoid co-channel
operation with these systems.
Dynamic Host
Configuration
Protocol
See DHCP.
Electronic Serial
Number
Hardware address that the factory assigns to the module for identification in the
Data Link layer interface of the Open Systems Interconnection system. This
address serves as an electronic serial number. Same as MAC Address.
Enable
To turn on a feature in the module after the feature activation file has activated the
module to use the feature. See also Activate.
ESN
Electronic Serial Number. The hardware address that the factory assigns to the
module for identification in the Data Link layer interface of the Open Systems
Interconnection system. This address serves as an electronic serial number. Same as
MAC Address.
EthBusErr Field
This field displays how many Ethernet bus errors occurred on the Ethernet
controller.
Ethernet Protocol
Any of several IEEE standards that define the contents of frames that are
transferred from one network element to another through Ethernet connections.
Fade Margin
The difference between strength of the received signal and the strength that the
receiver requires for maintaining a reliable link. A higher fade margin is
characteristic of a more reliable link. Standard operating margin.
FCC
Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.A.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Term
Definition
Fieldprogrammable
Gate Array
Array of logic, relational data, and wiring data that is factory programmed and can
be reprogrammed.
File Transfer
Protocol
Utility that transfers of files through TCP (Transport Control Protocol) between
computing devices that do not operate on the same platform. Defined in RFC 959.
See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc959.html.
FPGA
Field-programmable Gate Array. An array of logic, relational data, and wiring data
that is factory programmed and can be reprogrammed.
Frame Timing
Pulse Gated Field
Toggle parameter that prevents or allows the module to continue to propagate GPS
sync timing when the module no longer receives the timing.
Free Space Path
Loss
Signal attenuation that is naturally caused by atmospheric conditions and by the
distance between the antenna and the receiver.
Fresnel Zone
Space in which no object should exist that can attenuate, diffract, or reflect a
transmitted signal before the signal reaches the target receiver.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol, defined in RFC 959. Utility that transfers of files through
TCP (Transport Control Protocol) between computing devices that do not operate
on the same platform. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc959.html.
Global Positioning
System
Network of satellites that provides absolute time to networks on earth, which use
the time signal to synchronize transmission and reception cycles (to avoid
interference) and to provide reference for troubleshooting activities.
GPS
Global Positioning System. A network of satellites that provides absolute time to
networks on earth, which use the time signal to synchronize transmission and
reception cycles (to avoid interference) and to provide reference for troubleshooting
activities.
GPS/3
Third-from-left LED in the module. In the operating mode for an Access Point
Module, this LED is continuously lit as the module receives sync pulse. In the
operating mode for a Subscriber, this LED flashes on and off to indicate that the
module is not registered.
GUI
Graphical user interface.
High-priority
Channel
Channel that supports low-latency traffic (such as Voice over IP) over low-latency
traffic (such as standard web traffic and file downloads). To recognize the latency
tolerance of traffic, this channel reads the IPv4 Type of Service DiffServ Control
Point (DSCP) bits. Enabling the high-priority channel reduces the maximum
number of SMs that can be served in the sector.
HTTP
Hypertext Transfer Protocol, used to make the Internet resources available on the
World Wide Web. Defined in RFC 2068. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2068.html.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
VI
Glossary
Term
Definition
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocols defined in RFC 792, used to identify Internet
Protocol (IP)-level problems and to allow IP links to be tested. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc792.html.
indiscards count
Field
How many inbound packets were discarded without errors that would have
prevented their delivery to a higher-layer protocol. (Some of these packets may
have been discarded to increase buffer space.)
inerrors count Field
How many inbound packets contained errors that prevented their delivery to a
higher-layer protocol.
innucastpkts count
Field
How many inbound non-unicast (subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-multicast)
packets were delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
inoctets count
Field
How many octets were received on the interface, including those that deliver
framing information.
Intel
A registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
inucastpkts count
Field
How many inbound subnetwork-unicast packets were delivered to a higher-layer
protocol.
inunknownprotos
count Field
How many inbound packets were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported
protocol.
IP
Internet Protocol defined in RFC 791. The Network Layer in the TCP/IP protocol
stack. This protocol is applied to addressing, routing, and delivering, and reassembling data packets into the Data Link layer of the protocol stack. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc791.html.
IP Address
32-bit binary number that identifies a network element by both network and host.
See also Subnet Mask.
IPv4
Traditional version of Internet Protocol, which defines 32-bit fields for data
transmission.
ISM
Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment radio frequency band, in the 900MHz, 2.4-GHz, and 5.8-GHz ranges.
L2TP over IPSec
Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP Security. One of several virtual private network
(VPN) implementation schemes. Regardless of whether Subscriber Modules have
the Network Address Translation feature (NAT) enabled, they support VPNs that
are based on this protocol.
Late Collision Field
This field displays how many late collisions occurred on the Ethernet controller. A
normal collision occurs during the first 512 bits of the frame transmission. A
collision that occurs after the first 512 bits is considered a late collision. A late
collision is a serious network problem because the frame being transmitted is
discarded. A late collision is most commonly caused by a mismatch between duplex
configurations at the ends of a link segment.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Term
Definition
Latency Tolerance
Acceptable tolerance for delay in the transfer of data to and from a module.
Line of Sight
Wireless path (not simply visual path) direct from module to module. The path that
results provides both ideal aim and an ideal Fresnel zone.
LNK/5
Furthest left LED in the module. In the operating mode, this LED is continuously
lit when the Ethernet link is present. In the aiming mode for a Subscriber Module,
this LED is part of a bar graph that indicates the quality of the RF link.
Logical Unit ID
Final octet of the 4-octet IP address of the module.
LOS
Line of sight. The wireless path (not simply visual path) direct from module to
module. The path that results provides both ideal aim and an ideal Fresnel zone.
LUID
Logical Unit ID. The final octet of the 4-octet IP address of the module.
MAC Address
Media Access Control address. The hardware address that the factory assigns to the
module for identification in the Data Link layer interface of the Open Systems
Interconnection system. This address serves as an electronic serial number.
Management
Information Base
Space that allows a program (agent) in the network to relay information to a
network monitor about the status of defined variables (objects).
Maximum
Information Rate
(MIR)
The cap applied to the bandwidth of an SM or specified group of SMs. In the
Cambium implementation, this is controlled by the Sustained Uplink Data Rate,
Uplink Burst Allocation, Sustained Downlink Data Rate, and Downlink Burst
Allocation parameters.
Media Access
Control Address
Hardware address that the factory assigns to the module for identification in the
Data Link layer interface of the Open Systems Interconnection system. This
address serves as an electronic serial number.
MIB
Management Information Base. Space that allows a program (agent) in the network
to relay information to a network monitor about the status of defined variables
(objects).
MIR
See Maximum Information Rate.
NAT
Network Address Translation defined in RFC 1631. A scheme that isolates
Subscriber Modules from the Internet. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1631.html.
NEC
National Electrical Code. The set of national wiring standards that are enforced in
the U.S.A.
NetBIOS
Protocol defined in RFC 1001 and RFC 1002 to support an applications
programming interface in TCP/IP. This interface allows a computer to transmit and
receive data with another host computer on the network. RFC 1001 defines the
concepts and methods. RFC 1002 defines the detailed specifications. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1001.html and http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1002.html.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
VII
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Term
Definition
Network Address
Translation
Scheme that defines the Access Point Module as a proxy server to isolate registered
Subscriber Modules from the Internet. Defined in RFC 1631. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1631.html.
Network
Management
Station
See NMS.
NMS
Network Management Station. A monitor device that uses Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) to control, gather, and report information about
predefined network variables (objects). See also Simple Network Management
Protocol.
Object
Network variable that is defined in the Management Information Base.
outdiscards count
Field
How many outbound packets were discarded without errors that would have
prevented their transmission. (Some of these packets may have been discarded to
increase buffer space.)
outerrrors count
Field
How many outbound packets contained errors that prevented their transmission.
outnucastpkts
count Field
How many packets for which the higher-level protocols requested transmission to a
non-unicast (subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-multicast) address. The number
includes those that were discarded or not sent.
outoctets count
Field
How many octets were transmitted out of the interface, including those that deliver
framing information.
outucastpkts count
Field
How many packets for which the higher-level protocols requested transmission to a
subnetwork-unicast address. The number includes those that were discarded or not
sent.
Override Plug
Device that enables the operator to regain control of a module that has been locked
by the No Remote Access feature, the 802.3 Link Disable feature, or a password or
IP address that cannot be recalled. This device can be either fabricated on site or
ordered.
PMP
See Point-to-Multipoint Protocol.
Point-toMultipoint
Protocol
Defined in RFC 2178, which specifies that data that originates from a central
network element can be received by all other network elements, but data that
originates from a non-central network element can be received by only the central
network element. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2178.html. Also referenced as
PMP.
PPPoE
Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet. Supported on SMs for
operators who use PPPoE in other parts of their network
operators who want to deploy PPPoE to realize per-subscriber authentication,
metrics, and usage control.
VIII
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Term
Definition
PPTP
Point to Point Tunneling Protocol. One of several virtual private network
implementations. Regardless of whether the Network Address Translation (NAT)
feature enabled, Subscriber Modules support VPNs that are based on this protocol.
Protective Earth
Connection to earth (which has a charge of 0 volts). Also known as ground.
Proxy Server
Network computer that isolates another from the Internet. The proxy server
communicates for the other computer, and sends replies to only the appropriate
computer, which has an IP address that is not unique or not registered.
PTMP
See Point-to-Multipoint Protocol.
Quick Start
Interface page that requires minimal configuration for initial module operation.
Radio Signal
Strength Indicator
Relative measure of the strength of a received signal. An acceptable link displays an
Radio Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value of greater than 700.
Recharging
Resumed accumulation of data in available data space (buckets). See Buckets.
Reflection
Change of direction and reduction of amplitude of a signal that encounters an object
larger than the wavelength. Reflection may cause an additional copy of the
wavelength to arrive after the original, unobstructed wavelength arrives. This
causes partial cancellation of the signal and may render the link unacceptable.
However, in some instances where the direct signal cannot be received, the reflected
copy may be received and render an otherwise unacceptable link acceptable.
Region Code
A general geographical area that can be further segmented into specific Countries
(see Country Code). Units shipped to regions other than the United States must be
configured with the corresponding Region Code to comply with local regulatory
requirements.
Registrations MIB
Management Information Base file that defines registrations for global items such
as product identities and product components. See also Management Information
Base.
RetransLimitExp
Field
This field displays how many times the retransmit limit has expired.
RF
Radio frequency. How many times each second a cycle in the antenna occurs, from
positive to negative and back to positive amplitude.
RJ-11
Standard cable that is typically used for telephone line or modem connection.
RJ-45
Standard cable that is typically used for Ethernet connection. This cable may be
wired as straight-through or as crossover. Later modules auto-sense whether the
cable is straight-through or crossover.
Router
Network element that uses the logical (IP) address of another to pass data to only
the intended recipient. Compare to Switch and Bridge.
RSSI
Radio Signal Strength Indicator. A relative measure of the strength of a received
signal. An acceptable link displays an RSSI value of greater than 700.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
IX
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Term
Definition
RxBabErr Field
This field displays how many receiver babble errors occurred.
RxOverrun Field
This field displays how many receiver overrun errors occurred on the Ethernet
controller.
Secure Shell
A trademark of SSH Communications Security.
Self-interference
Interference with a module from another module in the same network.
SES/2
Third-from-right LED in the module. In the Access Point Module, this LED is
unused. In the operating mode for a Subscriber Module, this LED flashes on and off
to indicate that the module is not registered. In the aiming mode for a Subscriber
Module, this LED is part of a bar graph that indicates the quality of the RF link.
Simple Network
Management
Protocol
Standard that is used for communications between a program (agent) in the
network and a network management station (monitor). Defined in RFC 1157. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1157.html.
SM
Customer premises equipment (CPE) device that extends network or Internet
services by communication with an Access Point Module or an Access Point cluster.
SM MIB
Management Information Base file that defines objects that are specific to the
Subscriber Module. See also Management Information Base.
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol, defined in RFC 1157.
SNMP Trap
Capture of information that informs the network monitor through Simple Network
Management Protocol of a monitored occurrence in the module.
Static IP Address
Assignment
Assignment of Internet Protocol address that can be changed only manually. Thus
static IP address assignment requires more configuration time and consumes more
of the available IP addresses than DHCP address assignment does. RFC 2050
provides guidelines for the static allocation of IP addresses. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2050.html. See also DHCP.
Subnet Mask
32-bit binary number that filters an IP address to reveal what part identifies the
network and what part identifies the host. The number of subnet mask bits that are
set to 1 indicates how many leading bits of the IP address identify the network. The
number of subnet mask bits that are set 0 indicate how many trailing bits of the IP
address identify the host.
Subscriber Module
Customer premises equipment (CPE) device that extends network or Internet
services by communication with an Access Point Module or an Access Point cluster.
Sustained Data
Rate
Preset rate limit of data transfer.
Switch
Network element that uses the port that is associated with the physical address of
another to pass data to only the intended recipient. Compare to Bridge and Router.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
PMP 450 Planning Guide
Glossary
Term
Definition
SYN/1
Second-from-right LED in the module. In the Access Point Module or in a
registered Subscriber, this LED is continuously lit to indicate the presence of sync.
In the operating mode for a Subscriber Module, this LED flashes on and to indicate
that the module is not registered.
Sync
GPS (Global Positioning System) absolute time, which is passed from one module to
another. Sync enables timing that prevents modules from transmitting or receiving
interference. Sync also provides correlative time stamps for troubleshooting efforts.
TCP
Alternatively known as Transmission Control Protocol or Transport Control
Protocol. The Transport Layer in the TCP/IP protocol stack. This protocol is
applied to assure that data packets arrive at the target network element and to
control the flow of data through the Internet. Defined in RFC 793. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc793.html.
TDD
Time Division Duplexing. Synchronized data transmission with some time slots
allocated to devices transmitting on the uplink and some to the device transmitting
on the downlink.
telnet
Utility that allows a client computer to update a server. A firewall can prevent the
use of the telnet utility to breach the security of the server. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc818.html, http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc854.html and
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc855.html.
Textual
Conventions MIB
Management Information Base file that defines system-specific textual conventions.
See also Management Information Base.
Tokens
Theoretical amounts of data. See also Buckets.
TOS
8-bit field in that prioritizes data in a IP transmission. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1349.html.
TxUnderrun Field
This field displays how many transmission-underrun errors occurred on the
Ethernet controller.
UDP
User Datagram Protocol. A set of Network, Transport, and Session Layer protocols
that RFC 768 defines. These protocols include checksum and address information
but does not retransmit data or process any errors. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc768.html.
udp
User-defined type of port.
U-NII
Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure radio frequency band, in the 5.1GHz through 5.8-GHz ranges.
VID
VLAN identifier. See also VLAN.
VLAN
Virtual local area network. An association of devices through software that contains
broadcast traffic, as routers would, but in the switch-level protocol.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)
XI
PMP 450 Planning Guide
XII
Glossary
Term
Definition
VPN
Virtual private network for communication over a public network. One typical use
is to connect remote employees, who are at home or in a different city, to their
corporate network over the Internet. Any of several VPN implementation schemes
is possible. SMs support L2TP over IPSec (Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP
Security) VPNs and PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) VPNs, regardless of
whether the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature enabled.
pmp-0047 (March 2014)

Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : Martin Gray
Create Date                     : 2014:02:27 15:45:44-06:00
Keywords                        : pmp-0047
Modify Date                     : 2014:02:27 15:46:41-06:00
Subject                         : 12.1.2
Language                        : EN-US
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Metadata Date                   : 2014:02:27 15:46:41-06:00
Creator Tool                    : Acrobat PDFMaker 11 for Word
Document ID                     : uuid:8c2ad3fc-4193-49d0-a4a4-a6b0a9fd52e8
Instance ID                     : uuid:8e1878d1-5baa-4b43-bb62-48785e8f5be1
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : PMP 450 Planning Guide
Description                     : 12.1.2
Creator                         : Martin Gray
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 11.0
Source Modified                 : D:20140227214338
Company                         : Cambium Networks
Category                        : September 2013
A4 Date                         : January 2013
A4 Ordno                        : pmp-0047
Headline                        : 12.1.2
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
Page Count                      : 225
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
FCC ID Filing: Z8H89FT0010

Navigation menu